英语七年级上册课件 篇1
一.单元分析
本单元以家庭为话题，以家庭介绍为任务学习That’s my sister. These are my brothers. Who is she?等句型的使用。要求学生能够做到：
1.运用这些句型向别人介绍某人的能力和与人交际的能力;
2.能向别人介绍自己的家庭情况;
3.在珍视自己的家庭，珍爱亲情的同时，关心不幸家庭的同学，对他们做力所能及的帮助。
二.学情分析
学生在小学中已经学习过一些家庭成员称呼的知识，对于一些简单的称谓表达没有问题，但书写仍然是有问题的。同时，由于中西方文化的差异，中国家庭中的一些关系可能不好表达，老师需要做必要的补充。
另外，由于计划生育政策的施行，同学们的兄弟姐妹少了，这对于brother, sister的概念的表达可能有些不利。但是，中国是一个注重家庭的国家，本单元的学习会让学生了解不同国家的家庭结构间的不同。同时由于班级内可能有来自单亲家庭的同学，在授课时要注意保护学生，不要伤及学生的自尊，同时要注意培养学生的移情能力。
三.课时安排
四课时
四.教学过程
Period 1 (A1, 3a, B3)
I. Teaching Objectives
1. Knowledge Objectives:
(1) Expressions: sister, mother, father, parent, brother, grandmother, grandfather, grandparent, family, those, who, oh, these, those, they.
(uncle, aunt, cousin, niece, nephew, here, photo )
(2) Structure: That’s my family. Those are my parents. Who’s she? She’s my sister. Oh, and these are my brothers.
3) Grammar: The plural forms of the demonstrative pronouns.
2. Ability Objectives:
(1) Learn how to introduce the family.
(2) Get Ss to know the names of the various members of a family.
3. Moral Objectives: Father and mother, I love you!
II. Teaching Importance(focus)
(1) Learn how to introduce the family.
(2) Get Ss to know the names of the various members of a family.
(3) Get Ss to know the differences between this/that is and these/those are.
(4) Get Ss to know who questions
III. Teaching Difficulties
1. 因为单复数的问题，学生对this与these，that与those的转换可能会弄错，
2. 在拼写时，学生习惯把mother写成monther。
3. grandmother，grandfather中d不发音。
Ⅳ. Teaching Aids
A recorder, multi-media
Ⅴ. Teaching Procedure:
Step l：Lead in
Enjoy an English song called the Finger Family, do daily greetings as usual.
Step 2: Pre-task
1. T: Today I’ll introduce a new friend.
Then show a picture of a boy to teacher new words about family members.
2. Work on 1a, match the words.
3. Listening practice: Do A 1b, first listen and circle the words, then imitate.
4. Look at the picture on SB P7, ask and answer in pairs.
Step 3：While-task
Photo show. 1.T ask and S answer
2. Ss ask and answer in pairs. Then Do A3a
3. Make a short passage about the photo. Then Do B 2b.
step 4：Post-task
Draw a photo of family and write about it, then share with friends.
Step 4. Sum up
Do exercises in class and check the answers
Homework
1.完成2号本P14-15 第一课时
2. 预习Unit 2 第二课时
3. 完成 Self check 2
4. 常规听读，听写作业
Layout of Bb
Unit 2 This is my sister. Period 1
sister, mother, father, parent, brother, grandmother, grandfather, grandparent, family, those, who, oh, these, those, they.
That’s my family.
Those are my parents.
Who’s she?
She’s my sister.
Oh, and these are my brothers.
教学反思：
Period 2 (A2)
I. Teaching Objectives
1. Knowledge Objectives:
(1) Expressions: well, have, day, bye, goodbye
(2) Structure: Have a good! Thanks! You, too. Bye!
— Nice to meet you. — Nice to meet you, too
(3) Grammar: Yes or No questions.
2. Ability Objectives:
(1) Identifying people and the relationship.
(2) Find out the correct relationship.
英语七年级上册课件 篇2
各位领导老师好，，我叫….我今天说课的内容是《牛津英语》7A Unit3 Let's celebrate第二课时。今天我要讲述的内容包括教学过程，教学创新方面，首先我要讲述教学过程，包括以下几点：
放一首圣诞歌，(问学生是否知道此歌曲，如果知道，可以进一步询问他们对这首歌的了解，然后延伸到本课主题，必要时可让学生唱这首歌，这样做可以缓解学生心情，调动学生上课积极性)
(“良好的开端是成功的一半”， 因此，我认为能以一种新颖的问候方式或复习方式进入一节课，，或循序渐进地导入所学的内容，那么可为这节课的成功打下基础，同时也能给自己适当的减压。)
通过对本课核心内容的揭示，可以为接下来的讨论做铺垫，我作为教师是一个引导者，可以率先发起简单的英语口语对话，由此促使更多学生参与。对话如下模式；
T:Do you know some famous festivals in china or western countries？
T:Great!Can you give us some examples? Just say something about it?
学生展开讨论并自愿回答。
这项活动使学生能够自由发挥，逐渐克服害羞不敢发言的缺点。课堂是学生展现自己的地方，而教师的鼓励少不了。通过学生发言，也可以使他们对本课知识印象深刻。丰富了学生的知识。
在PPT上会有不同国家地区某个节日庆祝的画面，让学生进行猜测，猜对者有奖励，学生回答完毕后，可以对他们进行知识的相关扩充。再让学生发言，说一说中国的一些传统节日风俗习惯及来源。
先让学生自己阅读，找出生词，并告诉老师，老师提醒之后带领学生阅读两遍，并且释义。讲解知识点。然后学生合作准备，老师请学生朗读。
5.展示重点词组句型，并进行练习。
在PPT上展示重点知识点如：
What are you cooking?
Why do you like fishing?
Where are you going?
Which is your favorite festival?
Thank you for telling me about the Mid-Autumn Festival.
It is wonderful!
Happy Halloween!
以及介词in, at, on用法，频率副词的使用。
然后进行课堂小测验，腾出五分钟让学生消化知识，对于不懂的知识点可以像老师提问。
这样设计的意图是使学生能够做到学以致用，对于掌握不太好的知识点可以加强记忆与理解。
做完练习之后，将知识点归纳整理，并让学生做好笔记，使学生养成良好的学习习惯。
将主要知识点罗列在黑板上，如重点词组句型等等，让学生能够一目了然，自主归纳总结
B要求学生写一篇有关庆祝节日的文章。在以上的学习过程中，学生以具备了阅读和处理相关信息的能力，因此这部分任务交给学生自己完成，以此提供学生运用语言，解决问题的空间。
C要求学生学完本课时后有自己的想法，比如随着外国节日在中国的不断盛行，如何保护好本国文化，并能够很好的吸收外国文化，准备好200字左右的演讲，下节课展示。
例如在认识节日时，我就通过让学生听春节的鞭炮声和喜气洋洋的新年音乐猜“What festival is this?”通过美丽的月亮图片和实物月饼，问学生What do people usually do at the Mid-Autumn Festival?通过一则美国总统奥巴马首次赦免了一只重45磅（20公斤）、名叫“勇气”的火鸡的新闻引出.
这样做可以使学生的听觉、视觉等多种器官参与英语活动，能更容易地引起并保持学生的学习兴趣，最大限度地调动学生的学习积极性。
例如在学习讨论最喜欢的节日时，我采用了多种形式的师生互动和生生互动，同
时在使用课堂用语时，我都坚持对学生进行文明礼貌教育，总是加上please和thank you 对学生多鼓励，多表扬，
在互动的课堂教学活动中，教师与学生，学生与学生就教学内容进行平等的交流，真诚的沟通，互相借鉴，取长补短，在合作的氛围中，知识变成了话题，变成了手段，整个课堂充满了创造色彩。
英语七年级上册课件 篇3
教学目标 学习称呼语和问候语
教学重点 打招呼用语
教学难点 如何正确运用打招呼用语
教具 多媒体、录音机 课时 1
教学课程 1. Greeting.
2. Warming-up
T: Class,Please stand up. Hello, class.
S: Hello, Ms…
T: Sit down please.
S: Thank you.
3. Drills
(1) 练习打招呼问好。
(2) 练习感谢他人。
(3) 练习告别语Goodbye。
4. Practise
1)Work in pairs part7 and part8
2) Complete the sentences.
Daming, ______ ______, please(请坐)
_____,______ (同学们好)
______(你好).Jack.
_______,_______ (谢谢), Miss Li.
_______(再见), Lucy.
5. Conclude
6. Homework
Complete part5 and part 6 个人修改
课后评价
教案
课题 Starter Module1 Unit2 课型 listeningandspeaking
教学目标 学习打招呼的用语，询问姓名和相互间的问候。
教学重点 打招呼用语，询问对方姓名的特殊疑问句及回答。
教学难点 一天中不同时间的打招呼用语
教具 多媒体、录音机 课时 1
教学课程 1.Greeting.
2.Warming-up
T: Good morning.What’s your name?
S: I’m … / My name is…
T: How are you?
S: Fine, thank you. And you?
T: I’m fine. too.
3.Drills
1)练习打招呼的用语 Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening。
2)练习询问姓名和相互间的问候。
What’s your name? I’m …
How are you? I’m fine, thank you.
4.Practise
1)Work in pairs part7
2) Listen and number
3) Write the sentences.
nclude
6.Homework
英语七年级上册课件 篇4
一、Teaching materials:
Unit 3 Language in use (Module 10 Life history)
二、Targets for this perio d:
To summarize and consolidate past simple questions and negative sentences and the new vocabulary
三、Key points:
Key vocabulary— in, a lot
Key structures—Did you do…? Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t.
We didn’t do ….
四、Teaching methods:
Task-based approach, formal and interactive approach
五、Teaching aids
Blackboard, handouts
六、Teaching arrangements:
Step One To translate the sentences into English
1. 当你是个小男孩时，你骑自行车去上学吗?
Did you ride a bike to school when you were a boy?
2. 他是世界上最出名的作家之一。
He is one of the most famous wri ters in the world.
3. 七、八月份，我和哥哥拜访了住在海边的阿姨。
In July and August, my brother and I visited my aunt near the sea.
4. 莎士比亚是一个戏剧家和诗人
Shakespeare is a writer of plays and poems.
5. 1950年人们不使用移动电话和 计算机。
In 1950 people didn’t use cell phones or computer.
6. 当他在十四岁毕业时他决定当一名演员。
He decided to be an actor when he finished school at the age of f ourteen.
7. 你爹妈什么时候结婚的?
When did your mother and father marry?
8. 二十八岁时他迁往伦敦并加入一家剧团。
At twenty-eight he moved to London and joined a theatre company.
9. 他成了一名成功的演员并开始写戏剧。
He became a successful actor and started writing plays.
10. 你仍然能看到他的英文版和许多其他语言版的剧本。
You still see his plays in English and in many other languages.
Step Two To c omplete the con versation (Activity 1)
1. Students finish it by themselves.
2. Check the answers in pairs.
3. Two student act out the conversation.
4. Detailed explanation:
1) in +原料 / 颜色
e.g: He is in black.
He wrote a diary in ink. Cp: He wrote a diary with a pen.
2) a lot = very much ; often
e.g: He learned a lot when he was a child.
Step Three To use the conversation in Activity 1 to write about your parents. (Activity 3)
1. Students finish it by themselves.
2. Students read aloud their passage in the front of the classroom.
(Students should pay attention to the tense)
Example: My parents didn’t use computers at school when they were young. They watched TV with plain color and few channels. Sometimes they played f ootball and tennis in the park.
Step Four To learn about l ife in the past (Around the world)
1. Students read the passage and answer questions.
1) Did people use computers in 1950? No, they didn’t.
2) Was there satellite TV or Internet in the past? No, there wasn’t.
3) Why did people travel by bike or by bus? Because Cars were expensive.
4) Did they go to other countries on holiday? NO, they didn’t.
2. Students read it aloud.
Step Five To answer the questions according to the actual life ( Activity 5)
1. Students do it by themselves.
2. Studen ts work in pairs.
Step Six To finish all the exercises in Workbook
Homework:
1. To review Module 10 and copy all the words and expressions in P159
2. To finish Module 10, 点中典 & 轻巧夺冠
英语七年级上册课件 篇5
我说课的内容是北师大版数学七年级上册第三章的第一节课《字母能表示什么》，我主要从“教材分析”、“教法与学法分析”、“教学过程设计与说明”、“设计追求的特色”四个方面组织说课。
本节课北师大出版的新课程标准实验教材第三章的第一节课，在以前的学习中学生比较熟悉对具体数的操作，这是学生初次接触用较为抽象的字母来表示数，对字母表示数含义的理解有助于代数式以及方程的列出，是学习后续知识的关键。
1.知识目标：在现实情景中感受用字母表示数的意义，明确字母可以表示任何数，会用字母表示探索的规律，能用字母表示运算律和公式。
2.能力目标：经历探索数量关系，发现规律，运用字母表示规律，并通过运算验证规律的过程。
3.情感目标：一是体会字母表示数的意义，形成初步的符号感；二是进一步感受数学魅力，在学习过程中激发学生学习数学、探索数学奥妙的内在动力和外在的积极性，并在过程中培养学生的创新意识和实践能力。
1．立足本人的分析确定的：字母表示数的意义、数学规律的探索及符号表达，这些内容也是本课的难点。
2．可能基于学生个性差异、基础差异在学习过程中感觉困难的地方也是本课的难点。在教学过程中，我将认真注意，并尽力帮学生突破。
我校是定点的移民子女、进城务工子女就读学校，留守生在班级中占38%，学生的个性、基础能力差异很大，加上七年级学生处于小学与初中的衔接过渡初期，所以本节课我选择引导探索与分层教学相结合的方法。在新知的引出过程中，注意由浅入深，由特殊到一般地提出问题。引导学生自主探索，尤其在形成新知生长点的时候，充分发挥分层教学法的优点，帮学有余力的发挥潜能，挖掘
潜能，在先行的基础上发挥他们“先学后教”（后教就是帮助老师教，当老师的助手，在过程中达到教学相长的功效），教师抽出精力帮助学习困难的学生，帮助有“怪问题”的学生。注重时间分配，尽量做到先学在当堂，同层竞赛在当堂，异层帮辅在当堂，练习探讨在当堂、激发兴趣在当堂。
在教学过程中，关注每一学生，让每一个学生都动起来，促成学生成为学习的主人，从而发挥学生的主体作用。
（一）情景导入：利用电子白板的幕布创设问题情境（插入背景音乐，增加形象性和趣味性）：“一只青蛙1张嘴，2只眼睛4条腿，1声扑通跳下水。两只青蛙2张嘴，4只眼睛8条腿，2声扑通跳下水。三只青蛙3张嘴，6只眼睛12条腿，3声扑通跳下水。6767”，让学生把这首儿歌继续唱下去，唱几句即可，然后老师提问：在这首儿歌中假如有a只青蛙，那么请同学们思考一下，应该有多少张嘴，多少眼睛多少腿，以及多少声普通跳下水？问题设计具有一定的趣味性，引出可以用字母表示数。目的是激发学生的学习欲望，体现数学来源于实际生活，数学是从人的需要中产生这一认识的基本观点。
（二）实验操作：用电子白板拉出问题。鼓励学生用火柴棒或木棒，按照“口”、“日”、 “目”搭建正方形，然后填表，找规律。按照同层独立先竞争、异层小组后合作、全班交流分享的办法进行。
在处理问题的过程中，充分抓住新知的生长点做文章，前四个空是铺垫，后一个空是新知生长点。对学有余力的学生，要求把100变成10000填空。这样做既培养了独立思考、勇于探索的能力，又培养了学生的帮扶意识和合作品质，还激发了学生的进取精神。
（三）问题解决和方法交流：按照小组交流和班级分享的办法进行。展示出想到的各种方法，小组推荐代表发言，鼓励学生对发言进行诊断评价，及时提醒学生注意发言、评价有无不妥，充分发挥教师平等中的首席作用。在这个过程中，还注意数学学习氛围的打造，保持教师刻意打造学习氛围的意识。
（四）随堂练习。分层次推出练习。设置三组，一是必做题2个；二是挑战题2个；三是攻坚题4个。设计时注重了层次，必做体现了保底；挑战和攻坚有层次的观注了个性差异。在同层之间进行竞赛性的统计，控制了学生思考的松紧度。
随堂练习的评价由先行的学生负责，教师给予适当的提醒。基本按照学生先做----代表评价-----教师适当帮助的步骤进行。
（五）课堂小结：主要通过学生回忆本节课所学内容，从内容、应用、数学思想方法、获取新知的途径方面先进行小结。教师尽量不补尾巴。以免形成学生总结时注意力不集中，教师总结才听的局面，在学生总结不全面可以给足时间让学生补充，真正当好平等中的首席。
控制时间，尽量让学生当堂完成，不加重课后负担，不降低学习的积极性。
在本节课的设计过程中，我注重把握了以下几点：
1．既研究了教法，也研究了学法，基本按照以学定教的.思路进行设计。
2.重视了新知生长点，在新知生长点创造学生思考的问题，给足思考的空间。
3．注重了先学后教，而且尽可能让学有余力的学生去教，实现将带兵，兵促兵，兵教兵的局面。
4．发挥先进的教学手段如电子白板在教学中的辅助作用。
5．发挥学生的主体地位，摆正教师平等中的首席地位。
6．尽量做到课外不留作业，作业、练习分层安排，真正关注学生的个体差异。
7．注重创设学习氛围，激发兴趣，培养兴趣，巩固兴趣。
英语七年级上册课件 篇6
新版七年级英语上册课件【1】
我说课的内容是北师大版数学七年级上册第三章的第一节课《字母能表示什么》，我主要从“教材分析”、“教法与学法分析”、“教学过程设计与说明”、“设计追求的特色”四个方面组织说课。
一、教材分析
（一）教材所处的地位
本节课北师大出版的新课程标准实验教材第三章的第一节课，在以前的学习中学生比较熟悉对具体数的操作，这是学生初次接触用较为抽象的字母来表示数，对字母表示数含义的理解有助于代数式以及方程的列出，是学习后续知识的关键。
（二）教学目标
1.知识目标：在现实情景中感受用字母表示数的意义，明确字母可以表示任何数，会用字母表示探索的规律，能用字母表示运算律和公式。
2.能力目标：经历探索数量关系，发现规律，运用字母表示规律，并通过运算验证规律的过程。
3.情感目标：一是体会字母表示数的意义，形成初步的符号感；二是进一步感受数学魅力，在学习过程中激发学生学习数学、探索数学奥妙的内在动力和外在的积极性，并在过程中培养学生的创新意识和实践能力。
（三）教学的重点、难点
1．立足本人的分析确定的：字母表示数的意义、数学规律的探索及符号表达，这些内容也是本课的难点。
2．可能基于学生个性差异、基础差异在学习过程中感觉困难的地方也是本课的难点。在教学过程中，我将认真注意，并尽力帮学生突破。
二、教法和学法分析
我校是定点的移民子女、进城务工子女就读学校，留守生在班级中占38%，学生的个性、基础能力差异很大，加上七年级学生处于小学与初中的衔接过渡初期，所以本节课我选择引导探索与分层教学相结合的方法。在新知的引出过程中，注意由浅入深，由特殊到一般地提出问题。引导学生自主探索，尤其在形成新知生长点的时候，充分发挥分层教学法的优点，帮学有余力的发挥潜能，挖掘
潜能，在先行的基础上发挥他们“先学后教”（后教就是帮助老师教，当老师的助手，在过程中达到教学相长的功效），教师抽出精力帮助学习困难的学生，帮助有“怪问题”的学生。注重时间分配，尽量做到先学在当堂，同层竞赛在当堂，异层帮辅在当堂，练习探讨在当堂、激发兴趣在当堂。
在教学过程中，关注每一学生，让每一个学生都动起来，促成学生成为学习的主人，从而发挥学生的主体作用。
三、教学过程设计及说明
（一）情景导入：利用电子白板的幕布创设问题情境（插入背景音乐，增加形象性和趣味性）：“一只青蛙1张嘴，2只眼睛4条腿，1声扑通跳下水。两只青蛙2张嘴，4只眼睛8条腿，2声扑通跳下水。三只青蛙3张嘴，6只眼睛12条腿，3声扑通跳下水。6767”，让学生把这首儿歌继续唱下去，唱几句即可，然后老师提问：在这首儿歌中假如有a只青蛙，那么请同学们思考一下，应该有多少张嘴，多少眼睛多少腿，以及多少声普通跳下水？问题设计具有一定的趣味性，引出可以用字母表示数。目的是激发学生的学习欲望，体现数学来源于实际生活，数学是从人的需要中产生这一认识的基本观点。
在这个过程中，尽量发挥不同层次学生的作用，体现出学生的自主学习、自我探讨、总结交流等主体性的过程。
（二）实验操作：用电子白板拉出问题。鼓励学生用火柴棒或木棒，按照“口”、“日”、“目”搭建正方形，然后填表，找规律。按照同层独立先竞争、异层小组后合作、全班交流分享的办法进行。
填写下表：
1在处理问题的过程中，充分抓住新知的生长点做文章，前四个空是铺垫，后一个空是新知生长点。对学有余力的学生，要求把100变成10000填空。这样做既培养了独立思考、勇于探索的能力，又培养了学生的帮扶意识和合作品质，还激发了学生的进取精神。
（三）问题解决和方法交流：按照小组交流和班级分享的办法进行。展示出想到的各种方法，小组推荐代表发言，鼓励学生对发言进行诊断评价，及时提醒学生注意发言、评价有无不妥，充分发挥教师平等中的首席作用。在这个过程中，还注意数学学习氛围的打造，保持教师刻意打造学习氛围的意识。
（四）随堂练习。分层次推出练习。设置三组，一是必做题2个；二是挑战题2个；三是攻坚题4个。设计时注重了层次，必做体现了保底；挑战和攻坚有层次的观注了个性差异。在同层之间进行竞赛性的统计，控制了学生思考的松紧度。
随堂练习的评价由先行的学生负责，教师给予适当的提醒。基本按照学生先做----代表评价-----教师适当帮助的步骤进行。
（五）课堂小结：主要通过学生回忆本节课所学内容，从内容、应用、数学思想方法、获取新知的途径方面先进行小结。教师尽量不补尾巴。以免形成学生总结时注意力不集中，教师总结才听的局面，在学生总结不全面可以给足时间让学生补充，真正当好平等中的首席。
（六）布置作业：内容略。
控制时间，尽量让学生当堂完成，不加重课后负担，不降低学习的积极性。
四、设计追求的特色
在本节课的设计过程中，我注重把握了以下几点：
1．既研究了教法，也研究了学法，基本按照以学定教的思路进行设计。
２.重视了新知生长点，在新知生长点创造学生思考的问题，给足思考的空间。
３．注重了先学后教，而且尽可能让学有余力的学生去教，实现将带兵，兵促兵，兵教兵的局面。
４．发挥先进的教学手段如电子白板在教学中的辅助作用。
５．发挥学生的主体地位，摆正教师平等中的首席地位。
６．尽量做到课外不留作业，作业、练习分层安排，真正关注学生的个体差异。
７．注重创设学习氛围，激发兴趣，培养兴趣，巩固兴趣。
新版七年级英语上册课件【2】
Unit 1 Topic 3 How old are you ?
Section D
学习目标
1.学习以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码等个人信息
2.能读懂短文并能从简单的名片中获得信息
3.能向大家做自我介绍
学习重点
以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码
学习难点
第一人称和第三人称的转变
学习过程
(一)导入
(二)自学指导
1、预习课本P23 Part 1 ,复习书上的六个音标
2、预习课本P23 Part 2 ,分别找出Jane 和 Huang Hua 的个人信息
3、预习P23 Part 3 ,根据所给信息把空补充完整
4、背诵课本P24 Part 4a 4b
(三)问题导学 再看课本P22 Part 2 ,回答问题。
Where is Jane from ?__________________________
How old is she ?___________________________
What class is she in ? _____________________
Where is Huang Hua from ? _______________
What’s his English name ? _____________________
Are they in the same class ? ______________
(四)典题训练
(五)精讲点拨
1、They are not in the same class ,but they good friends.他们不在同一个班，但是他们是好朋友。
解析：same 意思是“相同的”，前面一定要用定冠词“the”，后面接单数名词。
but 意为“但是，可是”，起转折作用。
eg : We are in the same school ,but in different classes.我们在同一个学校，但是在不同的班级。
五.当堂检测
(一)用be动词的适当形式填空
1、---How old ________ you ?
2、----I ________ ten.3、---What _____ this ?-
4、---It _________ a pen.5、----Who ________ that ?
----She _________ Lucy.6、---What _________ these ?
----They ________ schoolbags.7、---__________ this a pen ?
----Yes , it _________.(二)单项选择
1.What’s that _______ Chinese ?
A、on B、in C、with
2.Is he ____________ English boy ?
A、a B、an C、the3、These are my _____________.A、book B、pens C、a friend4、---Is this your eraser ?----Yes ,____________.A、it is B、this is C、it’s5、They are not ________ the same class ,but they
are good friends.A、in B、on C、from
七、作业布置
(一)根据句意和首字母提示填空
1.They are in the s________ class.2、--How o________ is she ?---She is 15.3.Li Ming and Wang Fei are good f___________.4、I’m in a h_________ school.5、Is your p__________ number 3264-7853 ?
(二)选择填空
1、______ is Zhou Lan._________ phone number is 1358429764.A、Her , her B、She , her C、She , She2、What grade ______ your brother in ?
A、is B、am C、are3、---Is that a car ?---No ,____________
A、that isn’t B、that is C、it isn’t4、Nine and eleven is __________.A、thirteen B、fifteen C、twenty5、_________ are good friends.A、you ,he and I B、I ,you and he C、you and he ,I This is an English boy(男孩).His name is Jim.He is twelve.He is in my school.He and I are in the same grade.I’m in Class Three, Grade Seven, but he is in Class Four.I’m his good friend.He is my good friend, too.根据短文内容, 补全对话。
A: Excuse me, what’s his name?
B: His name is Jim.A: 6.______________________________
B: Yes.J-I-M, Jim.A: Where is he from?
B: 7.______________________________
A: How old is he?
B: 8.______________________________
A: Is he in your school?
B: 9.______________________________
A: Is he in Class Three, Grade Seven?
B: 10.______________________________
He is in Class Four, but he and I are good friends.A: Thank you.汉译英：1.布朗是他的姓氏。Brown is his ____ ____.12.那是一张地图吗
Is that ____ ____.13.它们是五辆公共汽车。
They are ____ ____.14.让我帮帮你吧。
Let ____ ____ you.15.给你。____ ____ are.(五)作业：请写一份自我介绍，内容包括姓名、年龄、国籍、班级、学校、电话号码。
七年级英语知识点
现在进行时态
概念：表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作，也可以表示目前一段时间内或现阶段正在进行的活动。
结构：由be动词(am, is, are)+ 动词ing构成，其中be动词要与主语保持性数一致。
Mary is flying a kite in the park.玛丽正在公园里放风筝。
--What are you doing now? 你现在在干什么?
--I’m reading English.我正在读英语。
Are they drawing the pictures now? 他们正在画画吗?
动词现在分词是动词原形变化而来的，规则变化如下：
动词ing形式叫动词现在分词，其构成如下：
1)直接在动词后加ing
play—playing, do—doing, talk—talking, sing--singing
2)以不发音的字母e结尾的动词，先去e，再加ing
make—making, write—writing, have—having, take—taking
3)以重读闭音节结尾的动词且词尾只有一个辅音字母，应双写这个辅音字母，再加ing
run—running, stop—stopping, put—putting, swim—swimming
注意对现在进行时态的判断。判断一个英语句子用什么时态，主要看句子的时间状语，一般说来，每种时态都有与之相对应的时间状语。现在进行时表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作。因此，这个时态最常用的时间状语是now;但有不少句子并没有now，只能通过提示语如look、listen等或者通过上下文来确定用现在进行时。
She is cleaning her room now.她正在打扫房间。
Look!The girl is dancing over there.看!那个女孩在那里跳舞。
--Can you go and play games with me? 你能和我们一起做游戏吗?
--Can’t you see I am doing my homework? 你没看见我正在做作业吗?
英语七年级上册课件 篇7
1. Knowing: tiring, educational, peaceful, fascinating, thrilling, take it easy, trek, jungle, fall,
2. Understanding: Be able to understand the meaning of the listening material.
3. Habit-forming: 1)---Where would you like to go on vacation?
---I'd like to go somewhere relaxing.
2) I like places where the people are really friendly.
4. Communicating: Talk about th e places they would like to visit and the reasons.
1. Habit-forming:
1)--Where would you like to go on vacation? --I'd like to go somewhere relaxing.
2) I like places where the people are really friendly.
2. Communicating: Talk about th e places they would like to visit and the reasons.
一.自主学习。
Task 1 Talk about the plans of vacation. 1. Read the adjectives and understand them.
2. Look at the two pictures careful, and write adjectives to describe the vacations .
3. 听录音完成1b。 4. Pair work:：
A: Where would you like to go on vacation?
B: I'd like to trek through the jungle, because I like exciting vacations. What about you?
A: I 'd like to ... ...
1.读2a 部分句子，听录音排序。2.Listen again, choose the right answers.
3.找出短语：对...感兴趣_______________ 有一天_________/___________支付___________
4.理解下面的句子：
1)Wouldn't it be great if we could go on a vacation together? ._________________________
2) I hope to visit Hawaii one day ._______________________________________________
3) Would you be interested in going there?_________________________________________
4) I like places where the weather is always warm.__________________________________
5) I love places where the people are really friendly._________________________________
6) There's not much to do there. _______________________________________________
7) It has exciting things to do. _________________________________________________
5.两人一组练习听力对话。
二.合作共建：1. I like places where the weather is always warm.
2. I love places where the people are really friendly.
这两句话中，引导的定语从句的是关系副词__________。也就是说引导地点用_________。思
翻译：我知道火车到达这里的时间。__________________________________________________
三.诊断评价：
I. 用所给词的正确形式填空：
1. I hope _____________(see) Niagara some day. 2. He likes _____________( visit) Hawaii.
3. He would like _____________(visit) Hawaii. 4. He would love _____________(visit) Hawaii.
5. There is too much____________(do) today. 6.It has exciting things ___________(do) there.
5.Are you interested in ______________( go ) on a vacation?
6. What about _____________(trek ) through the jungle?
II. 翻译句子：
1.你想要去哪里度假？_______________________________________________________________
2.我想到丛林跋涉，因为我喜欢刺激的旅行。_____________________________________________
3.我想要去放松的某个地方。___________________________________________________________
4.我喜欢天气总是很温暖的地方。____________________________________________________
5.在Mexico 没有很多事情可做。______________________________________________________
1.Knowing: touristy, spotlight, consider, lively, sight, including, church, wine, translate, light,
wonderful.
2. Understanding: Be able to understand the meaning of the newspaper.
3. Habit-forming: ---Where would you like to go on vacation? ---I'd like to visit Kunming.
4. Communicating: Talk about th e places they would like to visit and the reasons.
1. Habit-forming: --Where would you like to go on vacation? ---I'd like to visit Kunming.
2. Communicating: Talk about th e places they would like to visit and the reasons.
1. Read tthis newspaper article about Paris.Circle the things you like about visiting Paris. Underline
the things you don't like.
2. Write these phrases: 下个星期_____________________ ……的首都_____________________
最热闹的城市之一__________________________________在欧洲_______________________
举例___________________________________最著名的教堂____________________________
乘地铁___________________一般来说____________________说英语____________________.
3. Understand the following sentences。
⑴For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris?
①Why not…=__________________?是提建议的一种方式，另外提建议的句子还有：
Let's go shopping! ______________________. Shall we go to France? _________________
What / How about visiting Hongkong! _________________________________.
②consider后面跟名词或动名词。如：请考虑我的建议。______________________.
我正在考虑换一份工作。_____________________________________________________.
⑵Paris is the capital of France, and one of the liveliest cities in Europe. 翻译下面的句子：
北京是中国的首都。_________________________请用大写字母书写。__________________.
⑶It doesn't have any beaches or mountains…
or,连词，或者，用于否定句或疑问句中，肯定句用and.
你喜欢牛奶还是茶啊？____________________ 我有三个苹果和两个梨。________________.
(⑷Travelling around Paris by taxi can cost a lot of money.
动名词做主语,谓语用____________.吃的太多对身体有害。___________________________.
Task 2 交际练习1.仿照3b部分对话，两人一组编造自己的对话。2.交际对话展示。
Task 3 学习4 Think of a city you know. Make a list of things you like and things you don't like
about the city. then talk to your partner about it.
二.合作共建。1.区别spend , take, cost, pay 四个单词的区别。
2.France is quite an expensive place相似的单词为rather, 两者的区别为__________.
三.诊断评价。
( )1. Mount Emei is oe of_______in China. A.the most beautiful mountains
B.most beautiful mountains C.the most beautiful mountain D.most beautiful mountain
( )2.There are_____stars in the sky and you can see them at night.
A.thousand of B.two thousands C.thousands of D.two thousands
( )3.The dictionary________me . A.paid st C.spend D.took
( )4.You look tired, why not____a short rest? A.have B.having C.to have D.will have]
用所给的单词的正确形式填空。
1. Every year many___________(tourist)go there for their vacation.
2. There are many things__________(do)in Singapore. 3. Hong kong is a beautiful palce for____(shop).
4. Hawaii has beautiful___________(beach). 5. I decide_____________(visit)Beijing next month.
1.下个星期你要去哪里？_______________________________________________
2.我希望去游览夏威夷。_________________________________________________
3.在新加坡坐地铁观光是最容易的。_______________________________________
1. Knowing: brainstorm, agency, package, depend, advertisement, whale, actually. 2.Understanding:The meaning of the listening contents. 3. Practicing: answer the phone, take messages, call sb.back, some information on somewhere warm/cold, go on vacation, go on a nature tour, a great whale watch, depend on, find out. municating: be able to practice the listening contents fluently in pairs.
1.Understanding:The meaning of the listening contents. 2. Practicing: answer the phone,take messages,callsb.back,some information on,somewhere warm/cold,go on vacation,go on a nature tour,a great whale watch,depend on,find out. 3. Communicating: be able to practice the listening contents fluently in pairs.
Task1: Learn 1&2c 1. Answer some questions,such as,
①Where would you like to go for your vacation?Why?_______________________
②What are important to you when you go on vacation?_______________________
③Can you introduce some places of interest in the world?_____________________
2. Make a conversation according to the questions above,then practice in pairs,such as,
A: Where would you like to go? B:I'd like to go somewhere warm.
A: What else can you tell me? B:I don't want_________________________.
A:______________________ B:___________________________________.
1. Jeff has a summer job at a travel agency.Lsten to the conversations and number the pictures.
杰弗在一家旅行社有一份夏天的'工作，听对话并给图片标上序号。
2. Listen to the conversations again and complete the chart.
3. Role play Jeff's conversations and pay attention to the sentences using on the phone.
answer the phone_______________take messages______________call sb.back_______________
Jeff Marino speaking______________________Is that…speaking?_______________________
二.合作共建。根据下列句子，小组讨论划线部分的含义。
1. Could you please answer the phone?_____________________________________.
2. Just take messages and I'll call people back.________________________________.
3. I'd like some information on vacation packages,please._____________________________
4. I don't know. Somewhere warm._________________________________________________.
5. I hope to go on a nature tour..______________________________.
6. We have a great whale watch tour.You might like that.______________________________
7. It depends on where it is.______________________________.
8. I'd like to go somewhere that's fun for kids.______________________________________.
三.系统总结。
1.试总结常见的电话用语：_________________________________________________________
2.试回忆表达建议的句型：_________________________________________________________
3.总结would like的用法以及相似的结构______________________________________________.
1. Hawaii is a______________ (tourist) place. 2. I hope____________(make) more friends in China.
( )3. I'd like to visit Sydney _________ my next vacation. A.for B.on C.at D.in
( )4. What _________ can you tell me?A.other B.else C.the other D.others
( )5.—Would you like to go out for a walk with us? —_____, but I must finish my homework first.
A.Of course not B.That's all right C.I'd love to D.Yes,I do
6.我们想要待在一个有大游泳池的地方。___________ ___________to stay a place with a big pool.
7.下个假期你要去哪儿？___________ would you like to go ___________ your next ___________?
8.今年夏天你想去哪里度假?_____ _____ _________would you like to_______ _______this summer?
9.我希望游览夏威夷。I hope ___________ ___________ Hawaii one day.
英语七年级上册课件 篇8
一 学生情况分析(学生62人，其中男生：36人，女生：26 人)
1.学习水平不均
有的学生对小学英语比较重视，学得很好;但有的学生或学校不重视，学得很不好，还有几个甚至完全没有学过。有的学生笔试不错，但语音、语调、书写都有待加强。因此，整个班级的英语水平很不平衡，给日常教学带来诸多的不便，提高了难度。
2.学习习惯不好
学生刚刚从小学进入初中，处于一个衔接的阶段，学习任务加重，学习的习惯不是很好，没有形成一定的适合自己的方法，都有待改善。
总之，既要避免好生吃不饱的.现象，又要努力把目前英语有欠缺的学生拉上去，激发他们的兴趣和信心，赶上中上的水平学生。在今后的教学中应该注重培养、激发兴趣，教给学生学习的方法，从学生的学习兴趣、学习能力、生活经验和认知水平出发，倡导体验、实践、参与与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径，发展学生的综合语言运用能力，使语言的学习过程成为学生形成积极的情感态度、主动思维和大胆实践、提高跨文化意识和形成学生自主学习能力的过程，这是新课标和新目标英语的要求。
教学措施和辅助
二 课时总安排
总共100课时：授课 课时 复习 课时
测试 课时 机动 课时
三.教材总体目标、单元要求及重难点
The goal:
The goal of Go for it is to make language a step-by-step progression that builds confidence and leads to open-ended activities where students can actively relate learning to their personal lives.
Go For It! 是以《英语课程标准》为依据，以学生的英语语言综合运用能力为目标。不仅以语言知识、语言技能为重点，而且更注重学生的学习策略、情感态度和文化意识。教学内容的处理和取舍灵活开放， 只要教师从学生的实际水平和语言能力出发，任何教学内容的调整或取舍，任何教学步骤的安排都是可行的。“I sometimes go to the last to do the group work first…It depends on the teachers’ knowledge of the students actual language ability…”(David Nunan);提倡教师结合学生实际，充分利用学生、教师本身和环境中一切可以利用的资源，丰富教学内容，创造运用英语的机会，注意多渠道开发教学资源。 “Don’t use just the textbook. Anything in real life that connect and appropriate to the lesson can be used as teaching resources.”(David Nunan);提倡任务型语言教学，教学进度整体把握，教学形式不拘一格;课堂以学生为主体，以任务为主线，重视体验参与，课后访谈调查，读写扎记，重视语言运用;正视个体差异，倡导过程激励，以多层次、多角度、多主体的结果与过程并重的评价方式激励进步。
The key points of each unit:
Topic Functions Structures
U 1 Making new friends Introduce yourself
Greet people
Ask for and give telephone numbers Present tense to be
What questions
Prossessive adjectives:my,your,his,her
U2 Things in the classroom
Identify ownerships Demonstratives:this,that
What questions and Yes/No questions
How do you spell pen?
U3 The family Introduce people
Identify people Demonstratives:these,those
Subject pronouns:I,he,she
Yes/No questions
Plural nouns
U4 Things around the house Talk about where things are Where questions and Yes/No questions
Prepositions: on,in,under
Subject pronouns: they
U5 Spending time with friends Ask and answer questions about ownership
Make suggestions Present tense to have
Yes/No questions and short answers: let’s
Adjectives of quality
U6
Food Talk about likes and dislikes Present tense to like
Yes/No questions and short answers
Affirmative and negative statements
U7
Shopping Ask about prices
Talk about clothing
Thank someone Demonstratives:this,that,these,those
How much questions
U8
Dates Talk about dates When questions
Prossessive “s”
How old are you?
U9
Movies Talk about preferences
Make plans Present tense to want
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Adjectives of quality
U10 Joining a club Talk about abilities Modal verb can
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Affirmative and negative statements
What questions
U11 Daily routines Talk about daily routines
Ask about and say times When questions
What time is it?
Adverbs of frequency
U 12 School subjects Talk about preferences
Give reasons What questions
Why questions
Who questions
Adjectives of quality
四、 教材分析
新目标任务型教学的特色理念：《新目标英语》是以任务为基础的语言教学，在教材的设计上，遵循了自然言语、情境真实性、语言形式为交流功能性服务、层层深入阶梯型发展语言能力、在做中学等最新教学原则和理念，注重引导学生体会文化差异，培养学生自主学习能力，完全符合教育部的《义务教育阶段英语课程标准》的要求。本教材的教学理念：“知识用于行动”，强调“语言应用”，培养“创新、实践能力”，发展“学习策略”。
人教社《新目标英语》教材的几大特色：
A. 图文并茂。一幅副充满情趣，幽默生动的画面，令你眼睛一亮。它不仅版面设计充满新意，而且在内容和结构方面更富有创意 更具时代感，更有现代气息，更加贴近学生的生活。学生一拿到课本后都爱不释手，迫不及待地翻阅。
B. 实用性强。每个单元的选材都来源于学生的学习和生活。紧紧地与学生的年龄特征、认知结构、生活经验联系在一起。如第一册的十四个话题：认识新朋友、教室里的物品、家庭成员、食品、购物、电影、参加社团、生活习惯、学习科目、国家与语言。第二册的十二个话题：邻居、动物、足球、职业、周末活动、音乐、人物性格与外貌、天气、节日、度假与休闲、流行文化、规章制度与日常生活。由于这些都是学生熟悉的话题，生活中经常碰到的事情，所以学生容易接受，学习热情自然也高。使教学活动由“要我学”转变为“我要学”。
C.注重交际。针对中国学生学英语普遍存在的“聋哑病”，教材设计了大量的听说读写材料。每个单元都有语言活动，且内容不同，形式多样，学生对这些活动充满兴趣，所以大家都能情绪高昂地参加pair work, group work, games等活动。学生们充满了自信，开心地练习说英语，教室里常常充满了欢歌笑语。同学们都喜欢上英语课，他们能为学以致用而感到兴奋，同时也体验到了学习语言的快乐。
D.词汇量大。第一册有词汇700个左右，第二册约450个，第三册约450个，第四册约400个， 第五册约500个，合计2500个。这一点正好达到《英语课程标准》5级的要求。大大丰富了学生的词汇量，让学生能更好地表达自己的所思所想。同时也要求学生必须采取有效的记忆单词的方法，就会事半功倍，否则难以适应教材的要求。这时学生特别需要教师的指导 .。
《新目标英语》的教材设计原则
a.言语、情境真实性原则 (The authenticity principle)
任务的设计要提供给学习者明确、真实的语言信息。语言情境、语言形式等要符合交际的功能和规律。使学习者在一种自然、真实或模拟真实的情境中体会语言、掌握语言的应用。
b.形式-功能性原则 (The form-function principle)
任务的设计注重语言形式和语言功能的结合。形式-功能性原则，旨在使学习者掌握语言形式的同时，培养其自我把握语言功能的能力;每一阶段任务的设计都具有一定的导入性，学生在学习语言形式的基础上，通过系列任务的训练，能够自己进行推理和演绎，从而理解语言的功能，并在交际中进行真实运用。
c.阶梯型任务原则 (The task dependency principle)
学习单元中任务的设计由简到繁，由易到难，层层深入，并形成由初级任务到高级任务并由高级任务涵盖初级任务的循环。在语言技能方面，遵循先听、读，后说、写的设计顺序，使教学阶梯式地层层递进。
d. 在做中学原则 (Learning by doing)
自始至终引导学生通过完成具体的任务活动来学习语言，让学生为了特定的学习目的去实施特定的语言行动，通过完成特定的交际任务来获得和积累相应的学习经验。
五、教学具体措施及辅助活动
1.利用直观教具和教学辅助媒体，激发兴趣，增加容量，整体优化课堂教学。
2.每日进行单词竞赛。
3.学唱英文歌。
4.坚持值日生报告。
5.开展多种游戏和竞赛活动。
六、教学进度表
Week 1 Starter Unit 1 5课时
Week 2 Starter Unit 2& Starter Unit 3 5课时
Week 3 Unit 1 6课时
Week 4 Unit 2 6课时
Week 5 Unit 3 6课时
Week 6 Revision 6课时
Week 7 Unit4 6课时
Week8 Unit 5 6课时
Week 9 Unit 6 6课时
Week 10 Revision 6课时
Week 11 Middle examination 6课时
Week 12 Unit 7 6课时
Week 13 Unit 8 6课时
Week 14 Unit 9 6课时
Week 15 Unit 10 6课时
Week 16 Unit 11 6课时
Week 17 Unit 12 6课时
Week 18 Revision 6课时
Week 19 Revision 6课时
Week 20 Final examination
英语七年级上册课件 篇9
一、教学目标：
1. 语言知识目标：
1)
2)
① — No, I can't. / Yes, I can.
② …
③ help2.
可以培养学生的社会责任意识，为他人做自己力所
二、
1. 教学重点：
1) 能过听力训练来提高学生们听说能力。
2) 进行阅读训练，通过阅读简短的文章来学习语言知识，提高综合运用能力。
2. 教学难点
1. 听力训练
2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。
三、教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision
1. Daily greeting.
2. Check the homework. Let some Ss report what his/her family members can do.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. T: Show some really instruments like violin, drums. Then play some of them. Tell Ss I can play the drums, I can
play the violin, I can play the violin…
Ss: Do after the teacher, Act as he/she are playing an instrument. The say: I can play the piano, I can play the piano,
I can play the drums…
Ⅲ. Game (Talent show)
1. Act and show your classmates your talent.
T: Please stand in front of your classmate. Act and say what you can. e.g.
S1: (sing and dance) I can sing and dance.
S2: (play the drum) I can play the drum.
S3: …
2. Ask as many students as possible to say their abilities.
Ⅳ. Listening
the sounds you hear in 1a.
2. Play the recording again and check the answers.
3. T: Now let's work on 1c. First, let one student read the words and phrases aloud.
Then listen to the tape and circle the words and phrase you hear.
4. Ss listen to the tape and circle the words and phrases they hear.
5. Check the answers:
tape again. Then try to fill in the blanks.
动作这两个方面的听清，其他作为非重点内容。
7. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to fill in the blanks.
8. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅴ. Group work
S1: Bill can play the guitar, but he can't sing.
S3: Frank can play the piano, but he can't sing or dance. S4: …
Ⅵ. Reading
1. T: Let's meet three new friends, Peter, Aland and Ma Huan. What can they do?
S2: What can Alan do?
Ⅶ. Reading
What's each ad's title? Now let's read the three
2. 综合广告内容与三个题目，看每个题目与广告的内容是否最为贴切。
4. Check the answers with the class.
Ⅷ. Reading
1. T: Suppose Peter, Alan and Ma Huan want to help to do something after school. Which ad is right him/her? Now
2. 方法指导：首先，再次明确每个能做的事情，以及他/她喜欢做的事情;然后，看每则广告中要求应聘者去
做什么事情;最后，综合考虑三个人的情况，做出一个选择。
英语七年级上册课件 篇10
尊敬的各位老师：
大家好！
今天我说课的`内容是七年级英语上册第五单元第一课时，这一课时可分为三部分，一是要求掌握一些球类运动的名词，英语单词是学好英语的基础，只有掌握大量的英语单词，在丰富知识的同时，才能提高应用语言的能力；第二部分是听力训练；第三部分是口语训练Do you have a ……句型。下面我将从以下几个方面阐述说课内容。
一、教材分析
本教材倡导语言教学的交互性和实用性，为学生提出了自然的、有意义的语言环境，本单元主要是学习动词have的一般现在时的用法：Let引导的祈使句及形容词的使用，一般现在时是第五第六两个单元的重难点、学会第三人称单数形式的灵活使用，同时也复习了第三单元名词复数的变化规则，谈论对各种球类运动的看法，从而引出形容词的用法，用层层递进的方式，逐步扩大和加深，具有很强的逻辑性，整体感。
鉴于以上的分析，为更好地实现目标教学，进而提高课堂效益，我结合教材特点及学生实际情况为这一节课拟定了以下目标。
1、知识目标帮助学生掌握三会、四会单词如have soccer ball tennis racket＝bat ping-pong volleyball basketball does让学生掌握句型的灵活运用
2、能力目标让学习形成良好的听说习惯，同时让学生了解一些与球类运动相关的信息
3、德育目标通过向学生展示一些体育明星的图片，让学生热爱运动、热爱祖国、激发学生的爱国荣誉感。
教学重点：本课的第一部分是一幅展示新功能在实际生活中运用的图画，图中引出了本课在操练新知识所需用到的重点单词，新的句型也呈现在人物头上的气泡中，本课的重点是让学生学会使用Do you have……的句型。
教学难点：句型Do you have……的肯定回答及否定回答
二、教法分析
根据教材需要，采取多种教学方法交互使用权用，精讲巧练，由浅入深、由易到难，提高学生的学习兴趣，展开循序渐进地深化教学内容，展开以教师为主导、以学生为主体师生双边活动，主要以直观教学、交际性教学和任务型教学，贯穿整个教学过程，增加了直观性和趣味性，激发学生兴趣，活跃课堂气氛，提高教学效果。
三、学法指导
我所采用的教法有助于学生掌握以下学法
1、科学地储备大量的学生感兴趣的课外知识，学生掌握了感受兴趣的丰富的课外知识才能进行良好、积极的语言交流。
2、掌握大量的语法知识、学生要交流就必须了解语言规律，丰富词汇、熟悉语法规则，学会由各个话题而展开的交际内容，这样学生的知识才记得深刻，灵活度大
3、及时巩固、反复记忆
教师在课堂上所讲的语言难点、重点、学生应及时整理、再次认识并积极使用。
4、养成听的习惯
学生要经常听录音，听教师讲英语，听同学们讲英语、这对学习英语是很有好处的，
5、积极操练，重在口头
在课堂上，学生要积极参与教师设计的每个教学活动，要大胆开口、课后和同学进行及时交流，把书本知识变成自己的知识和语言，只有多练才能实现脱口说英语的目的。
四、教学过程设计
我的课堂的整体设计分四个主要步骤进行，即新授、听力、巩固、和作业
第一步:新授
1、出示几幅图来出现我们这节课将会学习的球类运动的名词以及相应的名星：在教学单词的过程中，用What is this in English和How do you spell it句型和学生进行双边活动，掌握本课所学习的新单词
2、学习新句型，通过图，来学习I have a soccer ball……句型，并让学生多读、多理解I have……句型
3、让学生整体复习巩固一下我们这节课所学习的新单词，让学生会读，并掌握拼写。
4、让学生以唱的形式复习新单词及I have……句型，如Soccer ball . Soccer ball.I have a Soccer ball.
为活跃课堂气氛，请个别学生为下列句子谱曲并唱如basketball. basketball.I have a basketball.这一部分学生比较感兴趣，学生可随意发挥，也可根据自己所熟悉的歌曲的歌谱来唱出这些句子。
5、新授I have……句型的否定句，一般疑问句、肯定回答和否定回答。
第二步听力训练
请学生听录音，把所听到的单词圈起来，然后检查答案
请学生听第二遍，并跟着读，回答下列三个问题
Do you have a computer game?
Do you have a baseball bat?
Do you have a ping－pong bat?
第三步巩固
1、通过猜猜我有什么的活动。巩固句型Do you have……及回答
2、请学生以唱的形式练一练这对话
第四步作业布置
运用下面的单词编写三组Do you have……问句并作答
Volleyball football basketball
五、板书设计
DO you have a soccer ball
New words:
Soccer ball basketball volleyball baseball football tennis ping-pong bat＝racket
I have a soccer ball:
Do you have a soccer ball?
Yes I do. No I don’t
六、本节课教学效果的预测
本节课设计本着讲练结合的要求，把教学的内容目标化、课堂教学交际化、而且在设计充分考虑学生的现状，保证所有学生能够积极参与，能重视知识传授与能力培养相结合，循序渐进、因材施教、符合以教师为主导、学生为主体、以会学生为主旨、以练为主线的四主要求。
七、评价手段
课堂教学中主要使用的形成性评价，其主要目的不是为了选拨少数优秀学生，而是为了挖掘学生的学习潜能，提高学生的学习兴趣，在课堂教学中，我便用的评价形式有两种：学生互评和教师评价。
英语七年级上册课件 篇11
人教版英语七年级上册Unit7 How much are these socks? Section A 1a-1c说课稿
新堡初级中学
石勇亮
一、教材分析
1.教材的地位、作用及前后联系：
新目标英语七年级上册第7单元第一课时（1a-1c）。
话题：询问价格，贴近学生的日常生活。
与Starter Unit3辨认颜色以及Unit 6谈论好恶联系紧密，学习询问价格的同时可以复习巩固之前的知识。
2.教学内容：
课题：How much are these socks ? 话题：“ask about prices”。目标语言：
--How much is „?
--it’s„
--How much are „?
--They are„
3.教学目标 ①知识目标
词汇：socks
shorts sweater trousers
jacket
skirt 句型：--How much is this T-shirt?
--It’s seven dollars.--How much are these socks?
--They are two dollars..②能力目标：掌握用how much„句型来询问价格，让学生能够利用简单的英语进行购物，培养学生的听说读写能力。③情感目标：
(1)树立正确的消费观念，养成节约用钱的生活习惯；(2)知道人民币与美元的差别，了解中西方的文化差异。4.教学重点与难点
我把名词单复数的应用和如何在现实生活中询问东西的价格确定为本节课的重点与难点。为了突破难点，教学中利用了大量的图片、实物，给学生提供非常直观的感性认识。
二、学情分析
农村学生学英语起步晚，怕犯错。在教学中努力营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围，积极鼓励他们大胆尝试，保护他们的自尊心和积极性。抓住七年级学生活泼、好动、好胜心强的特点，引进小组竞争机制，倡导其参与活动。
三、教法分析
1、情景引入法:利用多媒体创设情景，引入新知。吸引学生注意力，使他们对即将学习的新知识产生好奇。
2、听说法：对目标语言进行反复操练，以达到灵活运用的目的。
3、任务型教学法：设计一系列的任务活动，让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握目标语言。
四、学法分析 1.分组合作学习。2.“为用而学，用中学，学了就用”：本课时的目标语言是询问事物的价格，与学生实际生活联系紧密，所以应该充分利用创造的情景和实物给与学生练习英语口语的机会。
五、教学过程设计
Step1、Warm up and Lead in:
1、创设情境，引入新单词
socks shorts sweater T-shirt trousers jacket
skirt
2、复习学过的句型
What’s this ∕that in English?
What color is it?
3、注意名词的单复数 a pair of trousers/shorts/socks two pairs of trousers/shorts/socks Step2、练习、巩固新单词，完成活动1a、1b Step3、教授、练习新句型，完成活动1C
将dollar与人民币单位yuan相比较，注意dollar的单复数变化。
此环节中结合图片设计师生对话、结对活动、句子接龙等任务，让学生分小组竞赛，练习巩固新句型。在练习的过程中，将重点句型How much is it?发散为How much are they?重点掌握单复数在此句型中的变化。Step4.综合运用
How much is that red hat? It’s 6 dollars.How much are your white trousers？
They are 10 dollars.加大句子难度继续操练，巩固新词汇和句型。
此环节将表示颜色的形容词带入操练句型中，并结合学生穿的毛衣、裤子、身边的尺子、书包、铅笔、橡皮擦擦等物品让学生自己编对话。Step5、总结回顾 词汇：sock
T-shirt
shorts
sweater
trousers
shoe skirt
dollar
2、句型：--How much is this T-shirt?
--It’s 7 dollars.--How much are these socks?--they are 2 dollars.Homework: Ask about prices of your deskmate’s clothing, and write down your conversations.询问你同桌衣物的价格，并将你们的对话写下来。Step6、板书设计
Unit 4 How much are these socks?
(Section A
1a – 1c)Clothing
jacket
A: How much is this T-shirt? a pair of socks
B: It’s seven dollars.two pairs of trousers
A: How much are these socks? Shorts shoes skirt sweater
B: They are two dollars.
英语七年级上册课件 篇12
Unit 4 Where’s my schoolbag?
一． 教学内容
本单元的主要内容是谈论物品所在的位置。通过这一话题，训练学生的听、说、读、写四项基本技能，让学生通过询问物品的位置，学习一些有关家居物品和学习用品的单词，以及方位介词in, on, under,等的用法；学习并掌握Where问句的问答，一般疑问句提问并用方位介词来回答；学习名词单复数及人称代词they 的用法，同时培养学生养成干净、整洁、合理摆放物品的好习惯。
二． 教学目标
1．知识目标：A. 掌握有关物品的新单词：table, bed,, bookcase, sofa, chair,desk , room,hat , radio, clock,, tape player, tape, model plane, etc；
B. 熟练运用in, on, under, 等介词；
C. 熟练运用Where问句和一般疑问句及其回答；
D. 掌握名词单复数及人称代词they的用法。
2．能力目标：A.学会用英语准确描述物品所在的位置；
B. 学会用英语询问自己的或他人物品的具体位置；
C. 能够合理地描述和设计房间。
3．情感目标：A. 培养学生整齐地摆放自己物品的生活习惯；
B．通过小组对话、讨论、调查和设计等一系列的课堂活动，培养学生的合作精神。
4．学习策略：A. 交际策略: 学会与他人合作交流,并能把语言材料用到真实的生活中去；
B．资源策略：学会利用一切可利用的学习资源，如词典，音像资料，网络等来获取更多的学习信息；
C．认知能力：积极思考，及时反馈；
D．调控策略：在反思，顿悟和自醒中不断调整自己的学习策略。
三． 教学重点、难点
1． 重点：A. 方位介词: in, on, under, (add:behind, in front of, next to可以自己增或删)等的用法；
B．Where 的特殊疑问句和一般疑问句：Is the… in/on/under the …?的肯定、否定回答；
C． 新单词：table, bed,, bookcase, sofa, chair,desk , room,hat----
2． 难点：A. 能够准确运用方位介词描述物品所在的位置；
B．能够运用Where问句找到物品的位置。
四． 教学方法
采用任务型语言教学，实施情景教学法、交际法、情感激励法等教学方法。
五．课时安排
第一课时：Section A 1a, 1b, 1c
第二课时：Section A 2a, 2b, 2c, 2d
第三课时：Section A Grammar Focus, 3a, 3b,3c
第四课时：Section B 1a, 1b, 1c, 1d, 1e
第五课时：Section B 2a, 2b, 2c
第六课时：Section B 3a,3b,self- check
延伸阅读
八年级英语上册课件(实用13篇)
每一位教师必备的工具就是教案课件，所以可能需要每天都亲手准备教案课件。做出优秀的教案是教师职业能力的基础之一，不知道你是否因为不懂如何制作教案课件而感到困扰呢？编辑强烈推荐这篇和“八年级英语上册课件”有关的文章给各位，我们对您的阅读和点赞表示感谢，同时也希望您能把这篇文章分享给周围的朋友！
八年级英语上册课件(篇1)
一、 Analysis of the text教材分析
1、 Teaching教学内容：Talk about personal traits and how to compare people谈论人物的个性特征及如何对比人物
2、Statue of the Text教材的地位和作用
从教材的整合来说，本部分既有形容词用法的延续，又为后面形容词级的学习打下基础，具有承上启下的作用；从本单元来说，它既是本单元的基本语言知识，又为本单元知识的扩展和综合语言的运用奠定坚实的基础。因此，上好这一课，既可以让知识学习具有一定的延续性，又为后面的教学做好铺垫。
3、Teaching goals教学目标：
1）Language goal知识目标让学生掌握本课的词汇运用。
2）Ability goal能力目标让学生学会用英语与他人谈论人的个性特征和使用形容词进行比较的话题，以及进一步提高学生的英语语言表达能力；
3）Emotional goal情感目标激发学生的学习兴趣，体验英语语言的美，体验知识间的相互联系。让学生充满自信，体验成就感和合作精神。而且通过学习比较级使学生懂得在学习和生活中应相互理解、相互帮助、相互学习。
4、 Important points重点：掌握形容词比较级的变化规则及句型
5、Difficult points难点：使用比较级自如表达
二、Teaching Methods教学方法：
根据英语“课标”的要求，课程要从学生的学习兴趣、生活经验和认知水平出发，发展学生的综合语言运用能力，提高跨文化意识和形成自主学习能力。因此，我将在教学中采用多媒体辅助教学、任务型教学模式，结合听说法、竞赛法以循序渐进的方式来进行教学。
采用听说法和多媒体辅助教学来导入和呈现本节的基本词汇和句型，目的在于用师生互动的方式，共同观察图片，激活学生对所学知识的兴趣，使学生对新知识的识记经过一个由形象思维到抽象思维的转化过程，因此记忆效果更好。
采用任务型教学模式，在活动中以竞赛法来突出重点，培养学生综合语言运用能力，这样不仅激活学生的主体意识，而且激活了英语语言，使学生的自信感逐步增强，从而体验到成功的喜悦。
三、Learning Methods学法：
教法的选择固然重要，但学法也是必不可少的，我们都知道，学生的学习过程并不是孤立于课堂教学之中，应遵循学生的身心发展规律和学习规律，教师在教学的过程中要倡导学生体验、实践、参与、合作与交流的学习方式。瑞士心理学家让？皮亚杰的“建构主义理论”指出：学习是获取知识的过程，但知识不是通过教师传授得到的，而是学习者在一定的情景下，借助他人（包括教师和学习伙伴）的帮助，利用必要的学习资料，通过建构的方式而获得的。结合我校的学情，在本节教学中我主要采用归纳法和小组合作学习的方法。使用归纳法让学生归纳总结形容词比较级的变化规则；使用小组合作学习的方法，让学生参与竞赛和故事表演，使学生用心去体验集体的力量，去感悟合作的魅力，在活动中体验合作成功的快乐。
四、Teaching Steps教学程序：
Activity I活动一：Leading in激趣导入
在本活动中通过听说法配合多媒体辅助教学导入新课，用多媒体显示图画，让学生认识并掌握本课所要学的基本词汇。利用两个人物之间的不同，引出比较级的句子。让学生认识比较级的基本句型。本环节以学生原有的知识为切入点，对比两者之间的不同，不知不觉地将学生引入新课，达到润物无声之效果。
Activity II活动二：Warming up单词热身练习
要想让学生正确地使用比较级，首先应掌握形容词比较级的变化规则。因此，我给出一系列形容词及其比较级形式，让学生通过仔细观察并得出形容词比较级的变化规则，然后朗读记忆。在这一环节，我使用了教学的归纳法，意在培养学生的自主探究能力、观察能力和归纳能力。
Activity III活动三：Comparing句子热身练习
在学生掌握了比较级的变化规则后，便可以开始进行句子的热身练习。要求学生俩人一组用比较级来表达自己与同伴之间的差异，正确地认识自我。此项活动从贴近学生的`学习、生活入手，记忆深刻，使学生很容易掌握重点和难点，准确描述人物的个性特征。
Activity IV活动四：A guessing game“猜谜”游戏
——Who is he/she？他/她是谁？
我认为要充分挖掘教材的内涵，利用游戏来培养学生的听力能力和积极参与教学的主动性，要求一位学生描述班里的另一位学生，并和自己作比较，其他学生猜所描述的人是谁，这样可以给学生更多的发言机会来表达自己的思想。不仅反馈于上一环节的活动，也突出了本节的重点。学生在游戏中逐渐学会了用比较级自如表达，这也是突破难点的一个过程。
Activity V活动五：Competition小组竞赛
本活动采用任务型教学模式及小组自由合作学习的方式，这个环节的步骤是：把全班分为四个小组，每组抽取一个号码，在规定的时间内使用比较级对所抽取的图画进行描述，说出句子最多的小组获胜。此项活动可以培养学生的合作精神和竞争意识，同时可以训练学生快速思维的能力。
Activity VI活动六：Acting知识的拓展
此环节是通过任务型教学途径，分小组用所给的图画续编并表演故事。然后评出小组。这项活动要求学生积极与他人合作，共同完成学习任务，进一步培养了学生运用所学的知识锻炼口语表达能力、和逻辑思维能力。
此项活动后的小结也是本课的总结：“From this story we know，when we are better than others.Don’t laugh at others.When someone is better than you，don’t be frustrated.No one is perfect。 We should learn from each other and help each other.”这个故事告诉我们一个道理：当你比别人强的时候，不要嘲笑别人；当你在某些方面不如别人时，不要自卑。没有人是完美的。在生活和学习中，我们应该相互帮助、相互学习。
Activity VII活动七：Exercises巩固训练
用本节课学过的内容进行当堂训练、当堂巩固，做到“堂堂清”。
五、Homework作业：
《英语课程标准》建议教师把“任务型”教学活动延伸到课堂之外的学习和生活之中。因此，我在家庭作业布置中，分常规性作业和探究性作业两类：
常规性作业：背记本单元的生词。
探究性作业：写作文一篇，标题是“My Friend and I”。
（要求：写出你和你的朋友之间的相同点和不同点。）
六、Blackboard Design板书设计：
They are twins.
They are both lovely.
Xiaoya is calmer than Li Wen.
Li Wen is more outgoing than Xiaoya
A is形容词比较级than B
补充：学生在使用比较级时容易出现的问题：
1、比较的对象不一致。如：My hair is longer than you.
2、双音节形容词的比较级形式使用混乱。
八年级英语上册课件(篇2)
Section A
一、主要词汇：
consequence, jeans, let in, organize, bike, you’ll= you will
二、语言目标：
1. I think I’m going to stay at home. If you do, you’ll be sorry.
2. When is a good time to have the party?
3. I think I’ll ride my bike. If you do, you’ll be late.
4. I’m going to the school party.
三、语言结构：
1．If 引导的条件状语从句；
2．情态动词should的用法；
3．句型I think I’ll ride my bike. If you do, you’ll be late.
I think I’m going to stay at home. If you do, you’ll be sorry.
I’m going to the dance with Karen and Ann.
If you do, you’ll have a great time.
---Are you going to the party?
---Yes, I am. I’m going to wear my new jeans.
You should wear your cool pants.
四、学法向导
1． 学会讨论在某些条件下可能会产生的影响。即If you do, you’ll …等；
2． 注意条件状语从句中主句的从句的时态；
3． 了解参加晚会的一些基本常识；
4． 根据上下文培养理解能力和基本的逻辑思维能力。
五、教学过程
I 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动
1a
（教师）1. Read the instructions.
（教师）2.Point out the four pictures and ask students to tell what they see..
（教师）3. Ask two students to read the conversation in the speech bubbles in the first picture.
（教师）4. Say, Now read the statements and responses in the box. Match the statements with the responses you think make sense.
（教师）5. Answer any questions students may have about vocabulary.
（学生）6. Students match the statements and responses.
1b
（教师）1.Say, You will hear four conversations. Each conversation will give you the matching responses for one of the four sentences..
（教师）2. Play the recording. Say, Check your answers to activity 1a.
（教师）3.Talk about the answers together.
（答案）
1. d 2.a 3.b 4.c
（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript
A: I think I’m going to wear jeans to the party.
B: If you do, the teachers won’t let you in.
A: I think I’m going to stay at home.
C: If you do, you’ll be sorry.
A: I think I’m going to take the bus to the party.
B: If you do, you’ll be late.
D: I think I’m going to go to the dance with Karen and Ann.
C: If you do, you’ll have a great time.
1c
（教师）1. Read the instructions.
（教师）2. Ask two students to read the example in the sample dialogue in activity 1c. Say, You will work with your partner. Make a conversation using the things that are happening in the picture.
（教师）3.Ask several pairs of students to say their conversations to the class.
II 放完第二段视频后，
① 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动
2a
（教师）1.Read the instructions with the students.
（教师）2 Students complete the task.
（教师）3. Check the answers.
（答案）a. 3 b. 1 c.2 d.6 e.4 f.5
（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript
Andrea: Hi, Mark. I want to have a class party. Will you help me organize it?
Mark: Sure, Andrea. I can help you. So when shall we have the party?
Andrea: Let’s have it today after class.
Mark: No, today is too early. If we have it today, half the class won’t come.
Andrea: Okay, let’s have it tomorrow.
Mark: Hmm…There’s a test tomorrow. Students will leave early to study for their tests. Let’s have it on the weekend.
Andrea: Okay, let’s have it on Saturday afternoon. We can all meet and watch a video.
Mark: No, I don’t think we should watch a video. Some students will be bored. Let’s play party games.
Andrea: Okay, good idea. Can you organize the party games?
Mark: Sure, I can do that. And can you make some food for us?
Andrea: Yes, that’s no problem.
2b
（教师）1. Read the instructions.
（教师）2. Play the recording again.
（学生）3. Students complete the task.
（教师）4. Check the answers.
（答案）
Half the class won’t come.
Students will leave early to study for their tests.
Some students will be bored.
Mark is going to organize the party games.
Andrea is going to make some food.
2c
（教师）1.Draw attention to the sample dialogue.
（学生）2. Students complete the task.
（教师）3. Check the answers.
② 全班讨论
Ask students to work in small groups. Ask each group to write down as many sentences like those in the Grammar Focus as they can. See which group can think of the most sentences. Count how many each group has. Have the groups read their sentences to the class. Write original sentences on the board and discuss the sentences with the class.
III 放完第三段视频后，
请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动（教师）1. Read the instructions. Point out the notice from the principal. Then point to the dialogue. Say, First read the notice from the principal. It is about a school party. Then fill in the blanks in the dialogue.
（教师）2.Ask different students to read one line each of the dialogue to the class..
（教师）3.Read the dialogue to the class saying blank each time you come to a blank line.
（教师）4. Then say, Now read the notice again and fill in the blanks.
（教师）5. As students work, move around the room offering help where needed.
（答案）
1. the school party
2. I’m going to
3. The teachers won’t let you in.
3b（教师）1. Read the instructions.
（教师）2. Point out the words in the box. Say, You will be using the words in this box and the notice from the principal to make conversations.
（教师）3. Ask two students to read the example in sample dialogue in activity 3b. Say, In your conversations, tell what will happen if the student does what he or she is planning to do. Ask students to give some possible ways to complete the last sentence in the example.
（教师）4. Say, Now have a conversation abut the rules with your partner.
（教师）5. Ask one or two pairs of students to say their conversations to the class.
4
（教师）1. Read the instructions.
（教师）2.Ask two students to read the sample dialogue..
（教师）3. Ask another one or two students to suggest other charity events. Pick a topic of current interest in the news.
（教师）4. Ask students to complete the work in pairs.
.（教师）5. Ask a few students to share sample conversations.
注：黑色的斜体字是老师在课上组织教学时所用到的语言。
八年级英语上册课件(篇3)
新目标八年级上册英语教案范本
教案一：Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?
1. 教学目标：
a. 学习并掌握目标词汇和短语，如vacation, activity, tourist, guide等。
b. 学习并掌握目标句型，如Where did you go? I went to…
c. 学会用过去式叙述过去发生的事情。
2. 教学准备：
a. PPT展示相关图片和单词。
b. 学生练习册。
c. 录音机和磁带。
3. 教学步骤：
a. 导入：利用PPT呈现一些度假图片，引导学生回忆并复习相关单词和短语。
b. 新词学习：教师通过幻灯片和板书介绍并讲解新单词和短语，并提供相关例句。
c. 句型学习：教师通过示范并操练句型“Where did you go? I went to…”，确保学生能正确运用。
d. 练习册：学生完成练习册相关练习，教师巡视并纠正错误。
e. 听力练习：播放录音，让学生根据听到的内容选择正确的答案。
f. 拓展活动：以小组为单位，要求学生同伴之间互相询问对方的假期并作简短介绍。
g. 总结与巩固：教师再次复习已学内容，巩固学生的知识。
h. 作业布置：布置相关作业，如复习单词和短语，完成练习册等。
4. 教学评价：
a. 能正确运用目标词汇和短语进行交流。
b. 能够运用句型“Where did you go? I went to…”进行简单的对话。
c. 能听懂简短的听力材料并选择正确的答案。
教案二：Unit 2 How often do you exercise?
1. 教学目标：
a. 学习并掌握目标词汇和短语，如exercise, often, sometimes, rarely等。
b. 学习并掌握目标句型，如How often do you…? I … every…
c. 学会用正确的频率副词表达自己的活动频率。
2. 教学准备：
a. PPT展示相关图片和单词。
b. 学生练习册。
c. 实物道具，如计数器，用来演示不同活动的频率。
3. 教学步骤：
a. 导入：利用PPT呈现一些运动图片，引导学生回忆并复习相关单词和短语。
b. 新词学习：教师通过幻灯片和板书介绍并讲解新单词和短语，并提供相关例句。
c. 句型学习：教师通过示范并操练句型“How often do you…? I … every…”，确保学生能正确运用。
d. 练习册：学生完成练习册相关练习，教师巡视并纠正错误。
e. 实物演示：教师使用计数器和实物道具演示不同活动的频率，引导学生用正确的频率副词表达自己的活动频率。
f. 拓展活动：以小组为单位，学生互相交流关于自己日常活动频率的话题，并写下来。
g. 总结与巩固：教师再次复习已学内容，巩固学生的知识。
h. 作业布置：布置相关作业，如复习单词和短语，完成练习册等。
4. 教学评价：
a. 能正确运用目标词汇和短语进行交流。
b. 能够运用句型“How often do you…? I … every…”表达自己的活动频率。
c. 能根据实物演示理解不同活动的频率，进行表达。
八年级英语上册课件(篇4)
一、教师寄语
A bold attempt is half success.（勇敢的尝试是成功的一半）
二、学习目标
知识目标：
Words:
milk, junk food, health, unhealthy, habit, exercise, most, result, try, different maybe, although,
Phrases:
junk food, as for, on weekends, no students, try to do, look after, kind of
Sentences:
1.But my mother wants me to drink it.
2.She says it’s good for my health
3.I try to eat a lot of vegetables.
4.Is her lifestyle the same as yours or different?
能力目标:
学会谈论饮食习惯。
能了解哪些饮食习惯是健康的。
能阅读介绍饮食习惯方面的文章。学会养成良好的生活习惯和饮食习惯。
情感目标:
培养学生的逻辑表述能力，激发学生的积极思维，并使学生互相了解，增进友谊，
加强人际交往，以形成良好的人际关系。
三、教学重、难点
区分How many /how much, health/healthy, different/difference
四、学习过程
Step1. Free talk
同桌练习How often do you ……?及其回答
Step 2．1.Talk about the pictures. Practice the key words.完成1a
2. Pairwork Ask the Ss to show their works and perform it.
Step 3．Listening 完成2a,2b Check the answers
Step 4.合作探究
课文解析. 3a 3b
1.Warm up and Lead in: Say something about your eating habits
Talk about their eating habits.
2. Play the recorder. Listen and read 3a
3. Answer the questions .Try to answer these questions
4. Ask the Ss to sum up the language points Sum up the language points Textbook
5. Read and finish 3b Complete the article
讲解：
1.pretty:adj. 漂亮的，美丽的 adv.很，相当
2. when:conj. 当…的时候. 引导时间状语从句
3. eating habits饮食习惯
4. try to do sth.尽力做/努力做…. Try doing sth.试图做….
5. look after 照顾=take care of ，关注，注重
6. get good grades:得到好的成绩
7. help sb. (to) do sth.
8. the same as和…相同
9. different (adj.)- (n.)difference good –better-best
10. although虽然，尽管,引导让步状语从句，与though同义，但不能与but 同
时出现在一个复合句中，可与still, yet同用。
11. maybe:或许，大概,常放在句首
Step 5. 梳理归纳 Section B 词组归纳：
1) be good for 对什么有益 2) be bad for对什么有害
3) want to do sth 想做某事 4) want sb to do sth想某人做某事
4) 5)try to do sth 尽量做某事
6) come home from school放学回家
7) of course = certainly = sure当然
8）get good grades取得好成绩
9) some advice
10）hardly=not nearly / almost not几乎不
11) keep/be in good health保持健康
12）pretty healthy 相当健康
13) my eating habits 我的饮食习惯
14）drink milk 喝牛奶
15)so you see 正如你所看到的
16）look after 照顾
17)my healthy lifestyle 我的健康饮食习惯
18）help sb.do sth 帮助某人做某事
19)the same as 和….一样
20）be different from 与….不同
Step 6．达标检测 根据汉语意思完成下列各句，每空一词。
1. 做眼保健操对你的眼睛有好处。
Doing eye exercises _______ _______ _______ your eyes.
2. 我们尽量准时到达那里。
We _______ _______ get there on time.
3. 散步有助于保持健康。
Walking helps to keep ______ _______ ________.
4. —你多长时间看一次电影？ —我一个星期看两次。
— ______ _______ do you watch TV?
— I watch TV twice a week.
5. 每天运动对我们的健康有好处。
It’s good for our health ______ _______ every day.
Step7. 完成综训section B
Step8. 课后反思
我的收获：
我的不足：
我的疑问：
八年级英语上册课件(篇5)
1.了解通讯的基本特点。
1.培养学生搜集、筛选和整理信息的能力。
2.学习叙述、议论、抒情相结合的写法，培养阅读和写作的能力。
1.了解中队的发展情况及实力，培养学生的集体主义精神和爱国情感。
1.了解通讯的文体特征。
2.掌握本文围绕中心精心选材、巧妙组材的特点。
要保证我们祖国和人民的利益不受侵犯，就必须取大家之智慧，集大家之所长，以提高我国综合国力为目标，实现民族复兴。俗话说的好，国不可一日无“军”。国家要强盛，必须要有一个强大的军队。航母建设承载国人百年强国强军梦想，而只有舰载战斗机成功着舰起飞，中国首艘航空母舰——辽宁舰才是真正意义上的航母。让我们走进“我国航母舰载战斗机首架次成功着舰”的现场，去领略一下我们这支精锐军队的风采，去见证让人激动、自豪的“圆梦”时刻吧!
获悉我国将首次组织航母舰载战斗机着舰起飞的消息后，记者多方协调，随直升机飞降正在海上训练的辽宁舰，从高空中目睹了“航母就像汪洋中一片树叶”。现场采访中，记者获取了进入采访部位——辽宁舰岛塔台采访的机会，充分利用这个视角，全过程见证我国舰载战斗机首次着舰起飞。
娴熟：老练、熟练或灵活，形容对某种事物或工作很熟练。
定格：电影、电视片的活动画面突然停止在某一个画面上。文中指当时的相机记录下的场面。
1.教师范读，学生听读，在课文上标注生字词读音。
2.学生自读，了解课文大意，梳理文章结构。
介绍歼-15舰载机着舰前的准备，点明此项任务的危险。
描绘歼-15舰载机着舰的过程。
1.文章开头为什么描写渤海某海域海上恶劣的环境?
描写海风之大和海浪之汹涌，为下文舰载机着舰设置了集体环境，突出此时着舰之险，衬托了我国着舰技术的成熟。
2.文中引用着舰遇难事故数据有什么作用?
揭示我国航母舰载机首次着舰的意义——它承载着国人和海军官兵强军的梦想，交代舰载战斗机着舰是世界公认的风险的难题。渲染出紧张的氛围，引发读者的关注和继续阅读的兴趣，为下文写舰载机成功着舰后人们的喜悦作铺垫。
3.文章写着舰过程中，用具体时间显示进程，这样写有必要吗?
有必要。以时间为序更体现事件的紧迫性，给读者以真实感，给人一种身临其境的感觉。
4.这篇通讯在描写战机着舰过程时多次描写了四周人的神态和心情，简明扼要分析作者这样写的用意。
提示：战机着舰是这篇通讯的主要事件，而人们的神态和心情是辅助之笔，用以从侧面表现主题。要从气氛的烘托上、现场感的营造上、主题的突出上等角度综合分析其用意。表现人们对我国航母舰载机首次着舰的关注，烘托当时紧张的氛围、胜利的喜悦等。增强新闻的现场感，增强感染力。侧面表现舰载机着舰风险极大、意义重大，从而突出了主题。
请从修辞手法角度赏析下列文字。
声如千骑疾，气卷万山来。惊心动魄的一幕出现了：9时08分，伴随震耳欲聋的喷气式发动机轰鸣声，眨眼之间，舰载机的两个主轮触到航母甲板上，机腹后方的尾钩牢牢地挂住了第二道阻拦索。刹那间，疾如闪电的舰载机在阻拦索系统的作用下，滑行数十米后，稳稳地停了下来。”
提示：本段文字主要运用了细节描写(“震耳欲聋”“轰鸣”“眨眼之间”“刹那间”“疾如闪电”等)和对偶、比喻的修辞手法(“声如千骑疾，气卷万山来”)。
运用细节描写，生动形象地描绘出战斗机着舰的情形。“震耳欲聋”“轰鸣”描绘出战斗机着舰时巨大的声音，“眨眼之间”“刹那间”“疾如闪电”等词描绘出战斗机着舰时震撼人心的速度，“牢牢地”“稳稳地”表现了战斗机着舰的安全和平衡。运用对偶和比喻的修辞手法，增强文章气势，生动形象地表现了战斗机着舰时的浩大声势，具有感染力。
1.叙事完整，铺排有序。《一着惊海天》对舰载机首架次着舰这一重大事件，从身着马甲的工作人员到飞行塔台内指挥人员的连续对话，整个过程都做了完整记录。记叙紧紧围绕着检查阻拦索、塔台广播、着舰指挥员引导、战斗机降落这一套程序来展开，条理清晰，毫无杂乱之感。
2.重点突出，主次分明。舰载战斗机着舰实验，是一个复杂危险的系统工程，要把这一切完全记录下来是不可能的，也是没有必要的。读者关注的是着舰能否成功。作者就是抓住了这一环节来叙写。这个关键环节就是塔台指挥和着舰动作。作者集中笔墨叙写了着舰过程的状态，将此过程清晰展现在读者面前。
3.文风平实，脉络直观。作为科技类文章，要让读者有更清晰最科学的把握，语言不能太含蓄。作者在叙写中紧要处的口令和动作都用实词准确阐述，为的是让读者直观易懂，让舰载战斗机这一实验事件更加平实，为读者解开高科技的神秘面纱。
本文抓住歼—15舰载战斗机首次成功着舰这一历史意义的时刻，采用现场特写的写法，生动再现了举世瞩目的我国航母舰载战斗机首次成功着舰那惊心动魄的一刻。表达了作者强烈的自豪感和对工作人员由衷的景仰之情。
八年级英语上册课件(篇6)
1、教材的地位及作用：
第二册第六单元第一节课，本单元围绕Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?这个题材开展多种教学活动，它与上一单元联系紧密，是它的延续。本节课是本单元的重点。通过学习的Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?进一步加深对询问/指点方向的语法现象的理解和运用。同时通过Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?在陈述句与疑问句中的操练，进一步提高学生听、说、读、写综合素质能力。
知识目标：
(1)学习、掌握Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?
(2)学习单词bank, theatre … 。
能力目标：提高学生听、说、读、写及知识自学的综合能力。
确立教学目标的依据：
根据英语教学大纲规定，通过听、说、读、写的训练，使学生获得英语基础知识和为交际初步运用英语的能力，激发学生的学习兴趣，为进一步学习打好初步的基础。此外，根据我国国情和外语教学大纲的要求，现阶段外语教学的素质教育主要包括思想素质教育、目的语素质教育、潜在外语能力的培养、非智力因素的培养等四方面。
3、重点与难点：
重点：学习询问/指点方向Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?
难点：句型Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?在实际生活中的应用。
确立重点与难点的依据：
根据教学大纲的要求，及本课在教材中所处的地位和作用。
二、教材处理：
根据以上对教材的分析，同时针对中国学生学习外语存在一定困难的实际情况。首先给学生创造外语语言氛围，身临其境地把学生带到街区里。同时激发学生学习兴趣，使学生在参与询问/指点方向的一系列活动中，掌握知识。最后通过做游戏对学生所学知识点进行训练，从而达到巩固知识的目的。
三、教学方法：
通过五步教学法，精讲巧练，由浅入深，由易到难，由已知到未知，循序渐进地深化教学内容。展开以教师为主导，以学生为主体的师生双边活动。
四、教学手段：
主要以现代化电教手段--多媒体辅助教学，贯穿整个教学过程。增加了直观性和趣味性，加大了课堂密度，提高了教学效果。
为了激发学生的学习兴趣，引起注意，拉近师生距离，首先告诉学生这节课我将带他们去一个有趣的地方，并请他们依据我的提示猜测要去哪里?当学生猜出去农场时， 我们便“上车”， 一路欢歌去农场。随着“嘎”的刹车声，电脑打出农场全景， 给学生一种身临其境的感觉，导入正课。
本课利用多媒体教学手段展示了一幅幅色彩逼真、形象生动的画面，配有汽车声、动物的叫声，栩栩如生。以学生在街区问路为主线，通过询问/指点方向的句型Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?在一系列既关联又相对独立的语境中详细讲解，反复演练，使学生全面掌握。其中多媒体展示的动画部分更具特色，充分地调动了学生的积极性，吸引了全体学生的注意力，达到了教育教学目的，培养学生思想素质、情感素质和英语语言素质。
为了调动学生的积极性，利用Work in threes,in pairs,in row,in group,及Boys ask,Girls answer等多种不同方式操练巩固。使学生处于积极思维的状态之中，全方位、多角度培养学生运用英语的能力。
本课的又一次高潮是将游戏与练习有机结合，融为一体。设计15个街区模型，让一对对学生上街 问路，并配有本课的重点Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?使学生在玩中进一步体会到句型Where’s the … ?It’s next to the … ?在实际生活中的运用。学生通过转轮，边做游戏边做练习，寓教于乐，极大地激发学生学习兴趣，同时巩固了学生所学的知识。
本课除了板书所呈现的重点内容外，又把本课内容浓缩成韵律诗形式，巧妙地总结本课重点、难点，学生又通过优美的旋律、音韵动听的节奏。进一步巩固，加强对本课内容的理解和运用。
Language points:
1. Look at the picture.
look at 看 look through 查看 look up 向上看 look out 向外看 look over复习
2.the post office.
合成词：(1)写成一个单词：bookshop. (2) 写成开放式：post office (3) 用连字符连接：pencil-box.
5. excuse me 的用法：
6. Thank you all the same.
教学评价是整个教学过程中的一个不可分割的重要组成部分。本课是在《新课程标准》理念指导下的较能体现“自主、合作、探究”的学习方式，它较之传统教学方式相比有一个很大的区别--能使每一个学生都能积极地参与到课堂学习及课外活动中去。与之同时，带来的问题是：人是千差万别的.，每个人接受知识、获取知识的方式与快慢都有可能与别人存在明显的差异，这是客观存在的现象，更是完全自然的现象，这也就决定了在学习成效上存在明显的差别。有的学生发展较快，有的学生发展较慢，教师如果用一把尺子来量每一个学生所取得的成绩，势必是不合理、不科学的。为此，教师要对每一个学生的实际水平与课堂中在小组中的表现作深入的了解，为他们定一个“水平线”，并坚信每一个学生都能在原有基础上超越这条线，只要有点滴的进步，哪怕是隐性的，也要给予大张旗鼓的表扬与激励，让他们充分体验合作的乐趣，充分享受成功带来的快感。这样的评价，比量化的评价更有效果，比一刀切的评价更有针对性与实际意义;这样的评价，可以激起部分学生再接再厉，可以燃起部分学生“奋发”的欲望;这样的评价，不一定要形成文字，只要教师心中有一把可长可短的尺子。
本课以“小组合作学习”，作为一种教学方法、教学模式，绝不是一种简单的形式，不应该成为一种外部强加的过程，而应该是一个内部需要的自然过程。“合作”二字，对于未来的社会、二十一世纪的人才而言，是必需的;“小组合作学习”，对于未来的课堂可能更是必需的。因此，我们必须对其作一些思考，哪怕只是瀚海中的一朵小小的浪花，也是有价值的。
由于缺少经验，在教学过程中难免会出现不足，敬请各位老师不吝赐教。
八年级英语上册课件(篇7)
【学习目标】
1.学生学会关于假期去旅行的一些常用词汇与句型，并学会复合不定代词的用法。
2.通过与学生交流假期去哪里旅行的话题，提升学生的语言交际能力。
3.学生会用一般过去时态进行信息交流，形成环保意识，热爱大自然。
【学习重点】
学生能用所学的功能语言交流假期去了什么地方旅行。
【学习难点】
学习复合不定代词someone，anyone，something，anything等的用法。
Learning action tips: leading in by showing PPT about the students’holiday trip.
Topics：Did you have a good time during the vacation?Yes，Idid. Did you go anywhere interesting with your parents?Can you tell us where you went on vacation?……Review the past tense.
Task 1
Learning action tips: Preview the words on Page2 in the word list. Studentsread the words by phonetic symbols, then underline new words in the text and markthe Chinese meaning. At last finish the task in 1a.
【知识链接】
1.复合不定代词有：
某人someone
任何人anyone
没有人no one
每个人everyone
某事something
任何事anything
没有东西nothing
一切everything
2.anyone与any one的区别
anyone通常指人，侧重于个体，后面不带of;any one既指人，又指物，侧重于整体，后面可接of。情景导入 生成问题
1.T：Didyou have a good time during the vacation?
S：________________________________________________________________________
2.T：Wheredid you go on vacation?
S：________________________________________________________________________
自学互研 生成能力
Task1Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.
1.I can read.(我会读)
anyone，anywhere，wonderful，quite a few，most
2.I can write.(我会写)
翻译下列短语：
(1)待在家里stay__at__home(2)去纽约城go__to__New__York__City
(3)去夏令营go__to__summer__camp(4)与某人一起去go__with__someone
(5)buy something special买特殊的东西
(6)遇见有趣的人meet__someone__interesting
(7)study for tests为考试学习
3.I can summarize.(我会总结)
Did you buy anything special?其中anything 是不定代词。
复合不定代词用法小结：
(1)带some的复合不定代词常用于肯定句中;带any的复合不定代词常用于否定句或疑问句中。
(2)当形容词修饰不定代词时，应放在其后面。
(3)复合不定代词作主语时，都作单数看待，其谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。
(1)I did somethinginteresting last summer.去年夏天我做了有趣的事情。
(2)Did you go anywherecool on vacation?假期你去凉爽的地方了吗?
(3)在那里我没见到人。 I didn’t see anyone there.
Task2Let\'slisten to the tape and finish 1b，2a，2b.
Task3Let\'smake conversations and interview.
1.I can practice.(我会练)
A：Grace，where did you go on vacation?
B：I went to (1)Central__Park(中央公园).
A：Oh，really?Did you go with anyone?
B：No.No__one(没有人)was here. Everyone wason vacation.
A：Did you buy (3)anything__special(特殊的东西)?
B：No.I bought nothing.
【导练】
( C )Did you see ______ in the dining room?
A.someoneB.some one
C.anyone D.anyone
八年级英语上册课件(篇8)
【重要词组】
do the dishes，sweep the floor，take out the trash.fold your clothes，clean the living room，do chores，have to do sth，like to do（doing）sth，make dinner，make your bed
重要句型及语法如下：
Could you please clean your room？Yes，sure.
Could you please do the dishes？Sorry，I can’t.I have to do my homework.
Could I please go to the movies？Yes，you can.
Could I please use the computer？No，you can’t.You must do the dishes at first.
二、学生学情分析
本课话题来自学生的生活经历，学生在初一已经学习了许多动词短语，为表达提供了语言基础，此外，学生已初步掌握了用祈使句和Can you…？/Can I…？提出请求和建议，为本课的学习打下了铺垫。
活动设计的话题从谈论家务———对家务的看法（好恶）———父母和孩子之间承担的家务————社交、休闲活动等生活的各个方面，各任务层层递进，与学生的生活紧密相连，又是学生饶有兴趣的内容，为表达提供了真实的材料，使得学生在各个活动中想说、有话说，使活动参与的范围广，达到任务的真实性，有效性。
在学习中学生受到爱的教育，学会爱父母，爱家庭，爱劳动，学会如何与人交往，学会表达自己对事情的看法，使他们的个性得到张扬。
三、单元重点和难点
1、重点。
1）学习和复习一些常用的动词短语。
2）委婉地提出请求、征求许可做某事。
Could you/I please do things？Yes，Sure./ .I/You can.
Sorry，I / you can’t，，I / you have to do…”
3）学习如何请求他人的帮助。
2、难点。
在实际的生活中委婉地表达自己的请求和征求许可，获取帮助
四、教学过程
1、 Warming up
Enjoy ourselves.Watch cartoon Small Potato’s Sunday.
看动画片段《小土豆的星期天》导入本课话题和新词汇“chores”。小土豆周末一人在家。他过了一个非常快乐而充实的星期天。帮助父母做了许多家务活。片段的主题使学生联想到本课的话题。
2、 Learn new words and phrases
What kind of chores can you find in the cartoon？
学生通过在动画片段里找家务活，利用已学的简单词汇如make breakfast等导入新单词的学习。
Look！What is it used for？
看图。通过问学生这些清洁用品的用处学习动词词组do chores，do the dishes，make the bed，take out the trash，fold the clothes，clean the living room.
3、 Memory game.
What is she doing？Do you still remember？
通过记忆力游戏，让学生适时对所学词汇进行回忆以及进一步的巩固。并适当活跃课堂气氛。从这里开始对学生的活动进行分组竞赛。
4、 Discuss.
What do you usually do on Sunday？
先通过已学的简单句型，让学生再一次对所学的词汇进行练习。并在讨论后让学生做Pair work来热身。
5、 Listening.1b
Peter’s chores or Mom’s chores？
通过听力来巩固目标词汇。
6、 Make a survey.
Discuss in groups of four.
Draw a smiling face on the chore you like and draw a crying face on the chore you dislike
Then give a report.
通过做调查，复习句型I like … because…以及I don’t like … because…
学生在做调查的过程中了解自己同学的喜欢，为下一步如何委婉地提出请求做好铺垫。
调查表格附下：
Chores Like Don’t like
do the dishes
sweep the floor
take out the trash
make your bed
fold your clothes
clean the living room
7、 Pair work
Ask your partner for help
告诉学生可以向同桌寻求帮助，请求别人帮助你做自己不喜欢干的家务活。
导入目标语言Could you please do things？Yes，Sure.
Sorry，I have to do…
并进行对话练习。
8、Game
哑剧表演。一位学生利用Could you please do things？委婉地提出请求。另一位学生表演动作。活跃课堂气氛。
9、Pair work
Act out strict father or mother.
角色扮演。一位学生扮演严格的父母。一位学生扮演孩子。
学习目标语言如何征求许可做某事。Could I please do things？Yes，Sure.No，you must …
并做Pair work
10、Interview
How to be a better boy and girl？
让学生以小组的形式，采访自己的同学。讨论一次自己的周末计划。要帮助爸爸妈妈做什么家务活。在学习中学生受到爱的教育，学会爱父母，爱家庭，爱劳动。并且复习已学句型I’m going to do…
11、颁奖。给每个小组里的最能干者发奖。适时给学生爱劳动，爱父母的教育
12、 总结本节课的教学重点。
13、 Homework
Read the words and phrases you learn today.
Make a dialogue between you and your parent about doing the chores.
八年级英语上册课件(篇9)
【学习目标】
1.学生学会形容词或副词比较级形式的构成及两者进行比较的一些常用词汇与句型。
2.通过听对人物的外表进行描绘、个性进行比较的对话，学生学会怎样就两者进行比较。
3.学生学会用比较级进行信息交流，增强自信心，多交益友，快乐生活，快乐学习。
【学习重点】
用所学的功能语言交流如何运用比较级描绘人物的外貌与个性。
【学习难点】
学习形容词和副词比较级的用法
Learning action tips：Accordingto the actual situation of the students in class, create scene to lead in the new course by the way of teacher and student\'squestion and answer：
—Which one is more hardworking at their lessons? —Lisa is.
And revise the adjectives about describing the appearance and personalityof a person.
Learning action tips: Preview the words on Page17-18 in the word list. Students read the words by phonetic symbols, thenunderline new words in the text and mark the Chinese meaning. At last finish thetask in 1a.
【知识链接】
clearly adv.清楚地;清晰地;明白地
【拓展】
形容词后加上ly常构成副词。eg：loud→loudly;quiet→quietly;serious→seriously;usual→usually;different→differently;real→really
friendly adj.友好的
(1)friendly的比较级是more friendly。
(2)be friendly to sb.对某人友好的。
【拓展】
某些名词后加上ly可构成形容词。eg：month→monthly;mother→motherly;week→weekly;day→daily情景导入 生成问题
1.T：Whatdo you think of your best friend?
S：________________________________________________________________________
2.T：Isshe taller than you?
S：________________________________________________________________________
自学互研 生成能力
Task1 Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.
1.I can read.(我会读)
outgoing，better，loudly，quietly，hardworking，competition，fantastic，which，clearly，win，though
2.I can write.(我会写)
翻译下列短语：
(1)敲鼓play__the__drums (2)长(短)头发long(short)__hair
(3)更外向more__outgoing (4)和……一样努力work__as__hard__as
(5)起得早get__up__early (6)跑得快run__fast
(7)歌咏比赛the__singing__competition
(8)最主要的事情the__most__important__thing
(9)学到新东西learn__something__new (10)玩得高兴have__fun
3.I can summarize.(我会总结)
形容词和副词比较级的变化规则：
(1)一般的在词尾加er
(2)以不发音的字母e结尾的词尾加r
(3)以一个辅音字母结尾的重读闭音节，先双写这个辅音字母再加er
(4)以辅音字母加y结尾先改y为i再加er
(5)多音节和部分双音节词在该词前面加more
(6)不规则的变化需要我们用心记忆
写出下列形容词或副词的比较级。
(1)long longer (2)short shorter (3)nice nicer (4)early earlier
(5)big bigger (6)hot hotter (7)thin thinner (8)easy easier
(9)quietly more__quietly(10)beautiful more__beautiful(11)good better
Task2 Let\'slisten to the tape and finish 1b，2a，2b.
Task3 Makeconversations an interview.
1.I can practice.(我会练)
A：Peter，(1)is__that__Paul?
B：No, that\'s Tom. Paul is thinner thanTom.
And he also (2)has__longer__hair(更长的头发)than Tom.
A：Oh，(3)can__they__sing?
B：Yes, they can sing well.
A：(4)Who__can__sing__better，Paul or Tom?
B：Tom sings better than Paul…
win
v.获胜;赢;赢得
n.winner 获胜者
【辨析】
win与beat
两者均可作动词，意为“赢”，但用法不同：
(1)win(won，won)后接比赛、竞赛、战斗、奖品、钱等名词。
(2)beat(beat，beaten)后接竞争对手。
【导练】
(1)我们的队赢得了篮球比赛。Our team won the basketball match.
(2)昨天乒乓球比赛我打败了内莉。I beat Nelly at pingpong yesterday.
八年级英语上册课件(篇10)
Lesson 13
Teaching Objectives:
1. Master the comparative and superlatives of adverbs.
2. the comparative forms of long adjectives.
Language Focus:
fast － faster － the fastest well － better － the best interesting － more interesting get home have to kinds of feed, to give food to
Properties: Tape recorder, overhead projector, flash动画
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Revise be going to.
Ask individual students to open the door, close the window and do other classroom duties. As they stand up to obey, ask What are you going to do? Then ask the class What is he/she going to do?
Step 2 Presentation
Showing the picture of a farm by the overhead projector.
Ask What is this? What can you see on the farm? What kind of work is there on the farm?
Let the students to talk about the farm.
生活在农村的学生，可以让他们谈谈自己的农场情况，有多少种动物，农场的生活情况。
Step 3 Read and act
Get the students to look at the picture on page 16 and describe it.
Teach the new words about the animals on the farm.
Play the tape for the students to listen and ask How many kinds of animals are there on the farm?
Explain the language points:
have to, the plural form of sheep.
Explain the comparative of long adjectives. Give more examples, “My coat is beautiful. Her coat is more beautiful than mine.”
Play the tape again for the students to listen and repeat.
Have them work in pairs to practise the dialogue. Then ask some pairs to act it out in front of the class.
Step 4 Presentation
Call three students to the front and say, “Mary works hard. Lisa works harder than Mary. Lucy works harder than Lisa. Lucy works hardest of the three.”
Say another group of sentences and get the students to repeat, “Linda gets up early. Kate gets up earlier than Linda. Green gets up earliest of all.”
Step 5 Read and learn
Showing the students the picture of Part 2. Let them to describe the pictures with the comparative and superlatives of adverbs
Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat and check their answer.
Step 6 Exercise
Complete the sentences.
1. 我母亲的工作是照看孩子们。
My ______ ______ is ______ ______ ______ ______.
2. 你在家得做些什么？
What ______ you ______ to ______ at ______?
3. 让我帮助你喂鸡。
______ me ______ you ______ the chickens.
4. 吉姆在他们班上每天早晨到校最迟。
Mike ______ ______ school ______ ______ in their class every morning.
Answers:
1.mother’s job, to look after children 2.do, have, do, home 3.Let, help, feed 4.gets to, the latest
Step 7 Homework
1. Make a group of sentences to compare things.
2. Finish off the workbook exercises.
The design of the blackboard
Lesson 13wait sheephave to tractorfeed the animals slowmore interesting slower
教案点评：
利用幻灯片打出农场的图片，让学生了解农场导入本课关于谈论农场的对话的教学，通过图片的描述教学副词比较级。
Lesson 14
1． 教学目标；
（1）使学生掌握本课重点词组和单词：agree with, in winter, in summer, hear doing, play with.
（2）使学生掌握形容词和副词的比较级和最高级的用法和句型
Which do you like better, A or B? I like A better than B.
Which do you like best, A, B or C? I like A best.
（3）使学生学会介绍和比较中美两国农场的差别。
2．教具：Recorder and pictures.
3．教学过程：
Step 1 Revision
（1）写出下列单词的形容词和副词的比较级和最高级形式：High ,bright, interesting, good, beautiful, delicious, fast.
（2）出示图一：教师根据图片进行提问：
What kind of sport is it?
Which one is riding faster?
Which one is riding the fastest?
出示图片二：Who is taller? Who is the tallest in the three?
Which one is running faster?
Which one is running the fastest?
Is the second sport man running quickly?
Who is younger? Who is the youngest?
Which sports do you like better, the cycling or the running?
（3）复习第13课的对话，让学生回答以下问题：
Where do Ji Wei and Jone live?
What kind of animals are on Ji Wei’s farm?
What kind of work does he do then?
Step 2 Leading - in
Show students pictures of farms in China and America. They talk about the pictures first, then talk about the questions given in pre - reading in small groups. Teacher calls one group to do it as a model.
Step 3 Presentation
Part 1 Pre –read
（1）Show students a picture of a crowded city to teach the word “city” and a picture of countryside to teach “the country”. Draw a tractor on the blackboard and teach the word “tractor”. Ask them where people use that. Help them to say “in the country” or “in the field” or “on the farm”. Imitate the sound and teach the word “bleat”. Use a picture to teach “lake” and ask them what people can do in a lake, help them to answer “in summer, we can swim, or go fishing; in winter, We can skate on the ice.”
（2）让学生就书上的问题分组进行讨论。教师可以进行巡视指导。
（3）教师检查一组学生的讨论结果。
Part 2 Read
（1）Students read the article silently and answer questions
1. What’s the difference between Ji Wei’s farm and John’s farm?
2. Which play does Ji Wei like better, the city or the country? Why?
3. How about John?
4. Who is Cody? Say sth about Cody.
（3）学生阅读课文并找出课文中的生词和难点。教师进行讲解。
agree with, hear sb doing sth …
（4）教师让学生把这两个农场进行比较.总结相同点和不同点.
Chinese farm American farm
Small, grow more rice than American Big, grow more corn than Chinese, have more tractors and machines, have more animals
Step 4 Practice
（1）教师讲解句型：
Which do you like better A or B? I like A better than B.
Which do you like best A，B，or C ? I like A best 。
学生通过例子比较两个句型的区别。一组句型是两者这比较，另一组句型是三者这相比较。
教师可以出示一些实物如足球，篮球，排球等或红白蓝等颜色使用上句型进行叙述。
（2）Write the topic “The city or the country” on the blackboard for the students to discuss in pairs. (They may read the dialogue in the book as a model) Encourage students to use dictionaries to help them add new reasons. Point out “lots of” means “ a lot of, many.”
（3）教师出示媒体动画，学生根据媒体动画对画面进叙述，教师先只让学生看字幕和图，要求学生自己配上旁白。也可以先让学生看一遍内容然后再叙述。然后学生不再看字幕只看画面进行叙述。
Step 5 Exercise
1. Fill in the blanks.
I have a good friend who lives ① the farm.
He has many ② there, dogs, pigs, cows, etc. He uses a ③ to do the farm work , because it works faster and better. He don’t have to ④ the animals because they can find food themselves. He thinks the country is ⑤ (beautiful) than the city. He can hear the birds ⑥ and sheep ⑦ . And he often play ⑧ his dogs.
2. Compare the two farms, and two boys.
Ji Wei’s parents grow ① and ② , John’s parents grow ③ and ④ . Ji Wei likes to sit and looks at the ⑤ and ⑥ . John likes to sit and listens to ⑦ . John’s farm has a ⑧ where he often goes ⑨ in summer and ⑩ in winter.
Answers: 1. ①on ② animals ③ tractor ④feed ⑤ more beautiful ⑥) singing ⑦ bleating ⑧ with
2. ① rice ② wheat ③ corn ④ wheat ⑤blue sky ⑥ the green hills ⑦ the animals ⑧ lake ⑨ fishing ⑩skating
Step 6 Homework
（1）要求学生完成教科书90页第一题和第三题。
（2）把课文改编成一个对话
（3）To write out the article “The city or the country.”
The design of the blackboard
Lesson 14Li Wei’s farm John’s farm
use a tractor Use animals
like to sit and look at… Go fishing…
教案点评：
通过谈论运动图片复习副词比较等级的运用，展示图片引入关于中美两国农场的比较，让学生总结其特点，最后让学生谈论他们对农村和城市的看法。
Lesson 15
Teaching Objectives:
掌握形容词与副词的比较级与最高级句型的运用。
Language FOCUS:
help sb with sth like doing sth.
Eating too much is bad for you
Properties: Overhead projector, recorder
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
1. To talk about the country life.
2. Revise the comparative and superlative forms of adjectives like interesting, beautiful, etc.
Step 2 Compare
Showing the students the pictures to compare. Saying:
The car goes faster than the bike.
The train goes faster than the car.
The plane goes faster than the train.
So the plane goes fastest of all.
Ask Who works carefully in class? Help the students to answer Jim works carefully. Ask Who works more carefully than Jim? Help the students to answer Kate works more carefully than Jim. Ask Who works the most careful of all? Help the students answer Lucy works the most carefully of all.
Write the model on the blackboard
The car runs faster than the bike.
The train runs faster than the car.
The plane runs the fastest of all
Get some pairs to present their sentences.
Step 3 Practise
Students talk about the farm work they can do, write the jobs on the board “feed the animal, pick corn (wheat, etc), grow corn (wheat, etc)” Then they talk about who can do the most work, use the dialogue in the book as a model.
Give more phrases for them to use “have books” “get home early” “eat much” “run fast” “have a good time”, etc.
Step 4 Read and complete
Students do the exercise themselves and then check the answers
(The answers: older, exciting, beautiful, quickly, better, faster, longer, interesting)
Then explain some words and phrases, point out the comparative and superlative forms of adverbs ending with “ly” are “more + adverbs” and “most + adverbs”.
Step 5 Exercise in class
Complete the sentences
1. 公共汽车和轿车，哪个开得快？轿车。
Which goes__________ ______, the car or the bus? The car_______.
2. 所有人当中，我摘的玉米最多。
I can pick ________ ________ corns of ______.
3. 她喜欢住在乡下。
She likes ______ ______ the country.
4. 迈克经常读书到深夜。
Mike often reads ______ ______ ______ ______.
5. 我认为住在城市比城镇有趣得多。
I think ______ in the city is ______ ______ ______ than in the town.
6. 她经常帮她阿姨干农活。
She often ______ her aunt ______ the farm work.
Answers: 1.more quickly, does 2.the most, all 3.living in 4.until late at night 5.living, much more interesting 6.helps, with/do
Step 6 Homework
1. Preview new lessons.
2. Finish off the workbook exercises.
The design of the blackboard
Lesson 15 more the quickest the earliest The car runs faster than the bike. The train runs faster than the car. The plane runs the fastest of all
教案点评：
本课主要是以学生练习为主，通过图片展示让学生进行比较等级的训练。
Lesson 16
Teaching Objectives:
掌握比较级的用法；
掌握元音/u: / /u//uE/的发音。
Language FOCUS:
/u: / u, oo /u/ u, oo, oul /uE/ ure, ua,
What are you going to do after you leave school?
Properties: Tape recorder, pictures
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Revise the comparison of adverbs.
My mother usually gets up earlier than my father.
My father gets up earlier than I.
So my mother gets up the earliest of all.
Step 2 Spelling and pronunciation
Play the tape for students to listen and repeat, then ask students to practise the pronunciations of these words.
Use flashcards to give more words. Get them to practise the words.
Step 3 Rhyme
Play the tape for students to repeat and recite.
Read the chant together as a class.
Then divide the class into two groups to practise the chant.
Step 4 Listening
Play the tape for the students to listen. First make sure the students understand the meaning of the passage.
Then play the tape again and answer the questions.
Step 5 Word puzzle
First explain the word haystack means a large pile of hay firmly packed for storing.
Then students find out the words in pairs.
Step 6 Reading
Play the tape for the students to listen. Ask What is John going to do after he leaves school?
Students read the text silently and ask them for the main idea of the passage.
Play the tape again and answer the following questions.
1. Where are Ji Wei and John now?
2. What are they talking about?
3. Where did they do just now?
4. What is John going to do after school? After college?
5. What does he want to learn at college?
6. Who is following them?
Explain some difficult point “college, school for higher education”, “each, every” nobody, not anybody, not anyone .
Step 7 Writing
Showing the students the picture of Aunt Peggy’s farm. Get them to look at the picture carefully. First have them talk about the picture. Then have them write one paragraph about the picture individually.
Step 8 Checkpoint
Revise the adjectival and adverbial comparatives and superlatives.
Read the useful expressions.
Step 9 Exercise in class
Complete the words, using the proper words.
Different people have different ideas.
O______ people like life in the country, but y______ people don’t. They think life in the country isn't i ______. They like to go to the c______, have dinner in the r______ and s______ and dance with their friends.
My uncle and my a______ aren't f ______, but they live in the country. They grow f______ and vegetables for f ______. Every morning they will walk r ______ the fields. They can hear b ______ singing and sheep bleating. They often say, “Life in the country is much b______ now.”
Answers: Old, young, interesting, cinema, restaurant, sing, aunt, farmers, fun, round, birds, better.
Step 10 Homework
1. To write out the description of the picture.
2. Write one passage about the city or the farm you live.
3. Finish off the workbook exercises.
The design of the blackboard
Lesson 16 What is John going to do after he leaves school?(Go to college.)
八年级英语上册课件(篇11)
Lesson One
一、基本目标：
句型：
1）Welcome back!
2) Let me call your names.
日常交际：May I …?
I’m sorry.
It doesn’t matter.
二、教具：
录音机，大白纸（写上全班同学的姓名）、一张教师节卡片
三、教学设计：
Step 1 Part 1 Read and say
Say “Welcome to school! Everybody!”
拿出事先准备好的写有全班姓名的白纸，教授a piece of paper 之一短语及其他部分生词。
Teacher: What’s this in English?
Students: It’s a piece of paper.
Teacher: I have all your names on this piece of paper. Now let me call your names.
引导学生猜测这些句子的意思。
引导听录音，听前提问
Who is their English teacher?
Does he know the students’ names?
放一段录音，回答。之后集体跟读对话三遍（见媒体素材音频类：第一课课文跟读）
根据教材中的图片提问：What can you see in the picture?
Who is late? Why?
播放Part 1的视频，再让学生回答问题（见媒体素材视频类：Lesson 1 Part 1）
重点内容总结：
先由学生在书上自己找出用笔画上，再由教师带领，挨个说出，最后教师总结
Step 2 Part 2 Read and act
1）教师拿出准备好的卡片，说：Today is September 10th, Teachers’ Day.
这时学生会说：Happy Teachers’ Day, Mr./Miss …
学生们把自己准备好的贺卡拿出来送给教师。
2）放录音，问学生：What does Mr. Wu get? Who give him?
3）放对话跟读材料，让学生跟读对话（见媒体素材音频类：第一课课文跟读）
4）让学生仿照对话进行表演。可先欣赏这部分对话的场景视频。（见媒素材视频类：Lesson 1 Part 2）
Step 3 Practise
仿照课文对话，让学生进行表演。
Step 4 Exercise
练习：写张贺卡：注意
受贺人的称呼写在卡的左上方
贺词写得简短些，表达感谢及祝愿的话。
祝贺人的签名在卡的右下方。
参考用语：
Happy Teachers’ Day!
Thank you for teaching us so well.
Thank you for your help.
Thank you for your hard work.
Best wishes to you.
We wish you a happy Teachers’ Day.
Lesson 2
Teaching Objectives:
掌握本课的词汇和交际用语；
了解英国如何取名的，其名字的意义，如何称呼一个英国人，了解中国人的名字和英国人的名字的不同表达。
Language Focus:
think about/of, talk about, give a talk, That’s a good idea. Why don’t you …, the difference between…and…
English names (three names): a first name, a middle name and family name.
given name, full name, call me Jim, be short for
Properties: Tape recorder, overhead projector，视频素材
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Revise What’s your name? My name’s … etc.
如果学校有外籍学生的话，让学生注意他们的名字与我们的名字有什么不同。
Step 2 Presentation
Ask a student What’s your name? Teach full name and explain the meaning of call.
Giving an English name and a Chinese name, explain the difference between English names and Chinese names. 可以播放视频素材Difference between Chinese and English names .asf。
Step 3 Read and say
Play the tape for the students to listen, Ask What is Jim thinking about?
Explain give a talk and talk about，播放视频素材：关于give a talk短语的讲解 .asf，关于think about的讲解 .asf
Teach the phrase “think about” by gestures and some sentences. eg. Teacher frowns and thinks as well as saying “I’m thinking about the homework for today.”或播放视频：关于think about的讲解 .asf讲解think about
播放视频素材：关于why don't表示建议的讲解 .asf，解释why don't的用法。
Play the tape again for the students to repeat. Have them practise the dialogue in pairs.
Step 4 Reading
Say Jim is going to talk about English names. Ask How many names do English people usually have?
Play the tape for the students to listen and find the answer.
Explain the meaning of for short.
Discuss Chinese names: What do Chinese people call each other for short?
Explain how to call an English name:
People use Mr., Mrs., Ms or Miss with their last names.
播放视频：关于如何称呼英国人的讲解进行分析讲解
Then Explain the different between Chinese names and English names.
Play the tape again, get the students to answer these questions:
1. How many names are there in a full name? What are they?
2. What’s the order of these names?
3. Which name is not often used?
4. What are the titles used together with names? How to use them?
Step 5 Exercises in class
Let them do the culture comparing exercise.
English name: James Allan Green
Chinese name: Zhang Cheng
In the English name, family name is 1 , it s also called 2 or 3 name. The given names are 4 5 . The name not very much used is 6 . it’s also called 7 name.
In the Chinese name family name is 8 , it s also called 9 or 10
name. The given name is 11 . It's also called 12 name.
The answers: 1.Green 2.last 3.surname 4.James 5.Allan 6.Allan 7.middle 8.zhang 9.first 10.surname 11.cheng 12.last
Step 6 Homework
1. compare the difference between Chinese names and English names.
2. Finish off the workbook exercises.
The design of blackboard:
Lesson 3
Teaching Objectives:
了解一些英美人的名字的缩写；
巩固现在进行时的运用。
Language FOCUS:
a lot (of) , many, much the present progressive tense
Properties: Tape recorder, cards with English names
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Show the cards with English names for students to tell which is family name, given name, how to call them.
Ask the students What’s your full name? What do your parents call you for short?
Step 2 Practise
Showing the English names cards, Ask Is … (name) a boy’s name?
Get the students to talk about the names in pairs after a model.
A: Do you know if Mary is a girl’s name?
B: Yes, it is a girl’s name/I m not sure, etc.
Point out the full and short forms of names. Practise the other question froms and answers in the same way.
Then. let them practise in pairs.
Step 3 Presentation
Teacher: What’s your name, please?
Students: My name is Zhang Da Min.
T: Can I call you Da Min?
S: Yes. (Sure)
S: What’s your name, please?
T: My name is Elizabeth, you may call me Liz, that’s short for Elizabeth.
Step 4 Read and act
Play the tape for students to listen, and ask Where is Sun Huifang from?
Have the students read the dialogue.
Then get them to work in pairs and act out the dialogue in pairs, they may use their own names or make - up names.
Step 5 Ask and answer
Have the students look at the picture and ask and answer questions about the picture.
- What is the boy doing?
- Which boy?
- The boy standing by the window.
- Oh, he’s cleaning the window.
Call individual student to the front, and make an action for the students to guess.
-Are you dancing?
-Yes, I am./No, I am not. (I'm not)
Step 6 Exercises in class
Write out the questions
The boys are having a football lesson on the playground.
① Who - ?
② What - ?
③ Where - ?
Answers: ① Who is having a football lesson on the playground?
② What are the boys doing on the playground?
③ Where are the boys having a football lesson?
Step 7 Homework
1.Describe the picture in present progressive tense.
2.Finish off the workbook exercises.
The design of blackboard
Lesson 4
Teaching Objectives:
Grasp the pronunciation of some letter clusters and understand the article.
Language Focus:
[ :] er, ur, ir, or, ear [a:]ar, a(ss),al [ u:]ou, ow
make sb sth, - make sth for sb try to do sth not…any more ask sb to do sth What are you going to do?
Properties: Tape recorder, Overhead projector, cards
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Review
1. Revise English names.
Give some names for them to say which is the family name and which is the given name. And how to use the titles Mr./ Mrs./ Miss/ Ms. Remind them that the titles can only be used with a family name.
2. Revise the Present Continuous Tense by showing a picture or miming an actions. Get the students to describe What he/she is doing?.
Step 2 Spelling and pronunciation
Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat.
Practise these sounds individually before practicing the whole words.
Show the students a flashcard with more words and ask them to pronounce the word written on it.
Step 3 Listening:
Play the tape for the students to listen.
播放课件：课文听力，Ask them to do the WB Ex.3.
Step 4 Read and act
Teacher: What are you going to do on Saturday?
Student: I’m going to…
T: Can you make a card?
S: Yes, I can.
T: Will you please show us your card?
S: Sure!
T: Oh, it’s really a nice card.
Play the tape for the students to listen. Then get the students to read and act out the dialogue in pairs.
Explain Where are you going? I’m going to ….
Play the tape again, and ask the questions:
① What does Tom’s mum want him to do?
② Can he do it? why? or why not ?
③ What is the idea Mum thinking out for Tom?
④ Do you think it’s a good idea?
Then get the students to act the dialogue out in pairs.
Step 5 Writing
Have the students write a dialogue in pairs. Then have several pairs read their dialogues for the class.
Step 6 Reading
Play the tape for the students to listen. Ask these questions:
Where is Phillip living?
How do people sometimes spell his name?
What name does Wang Jinging want to give Phillip?
Let the students read the text by themselves and answer the questions.
Then have the students work in small group to come up with a Chinese name for Philip.
Step 7 Checkpoint
Revise the Simple Present Tense and Present Continuous Tense.
Explain the difference between them.
Practise the useful expressions.
Step 8 Exercises in class
1. Read these word, pay attention to their pronounciation.
① bird ② part ③ grass ④how ⑤ trousers ⑥world ⑦ learning ⑧ clerk ⑨ birthday ⑩ blouse
2. To introduce Phillip in 40 words.
Step 9 Homework
1.Make an English name for yourself and make a name card to be placed on the desk.
2. Finish off the workbook
4. Go through the checkpoint.
The design of blackboard
Lesson Four, the fourth lesson [ :] er, ur, ir, or, ear [a:]ar, a(ss),al [ u:] Where are you going? I’m going to … Where is Phillip living? How do people sometimes spell his name? What name does Wang Jingjing want to give Phillip?
八年级英语上册课件(篇12)
Teaching goals (教学目标)
1.Words : barber shop , well , bathroom , accident , earth , silence , playground , around , strange , kitchen , modern , follow , shirt .
2.when , while 引导的时间状语从句。
3.学习过去进行时态。
4.利用知识谈论过去发生的事情。
5.复习过去式，学会讲故事。
6.了解一些自然科学知识和社会科学知识。
Important and difficult points：(教学重难点)
1.when , while 引导的时间状语从句。 2.学习过去进行时态。
Teaching aids : a tape-recorder , cards .
第一课时
Teaching procedures(教学步骤) :
Step 1 Leading in(导入话题，激活背景知识)
1.Greetings and free-talk . 2.Check the Homework(家庭作业) .
3.Dictate the words in Unit 2 .
Step 2 Pre-task(任务前活动)SB Page 18 , 1a .
1.Point to the sentences .Read the sentences .E_plain what each one means .
2.Look at the picture .Point out the si_ people .Match the statements with the people in the picture .
3.Check the answers .
4.Practice reading .
Step 3 While-task(任务中活动)SB Page 18 , 1b .
1.Read the instructions .Make sure the Ss understand what they should do .
2.Look at the dialogue in the picture .
语法：
过去进行时态的构成: was / were + doing .
用法:表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作，一般用时间状语来表示。
I was standing in front of the library when the UFO arrived .
3.Play the tape twice . Circle the correct responses . 4.Check the answers .
Step 4 Post-task(任务后活动)
Talk about what people were doing when the UFO arrived .
Step 5 While-task(任务中活动)SB Page 19 , 2a .
1.Read the sentences .Make sure the Ss understand what they mean .
2.Play the tape twice .Order these statements .
3.Play the tape again ,correct the answers .
SB Page 19 , 2b .
1.Read the instructions . 2.Play the recording .Write “when” or “while” on each line .
3.Play the recording again ,correct their answers .
Notice: when / while
※ When comes before a quick action that happens only once .The word “while” comes from an action that continues for some time .
Step 6 Post-task(任务后活动)SB Page 19 , 2c .
1.Point ort the picture .Ask what each person is doing .
work : Ask “What was …doing when the UFO arrived ?”
3.Ask a group to say its conversation to the class .
Step 7 Grammar Focus
Review the grammar bo_ by asking some students to read the sentences .
Homework(家庭作业) :
1.Go over the words in this unit
2.用介词或介词短语填空。
① They were talking the phone .
② I was he barber’s chair .
③ The boy was walking the street when a UFO landed .
④ I had a very unusual e_perience Sunday .
⑤ The alien visited the Museum Flight .
八年级英语上册课件(篇13)
培养学生优良的英语学习兴趣、习惯，帮助学生树立自信心，养成良好的英语学习习惯，提高、发展自主学习的能力，形成有效的学习策略;使学生掌握一定的语言基本知识和技能，有较好的语感，获得初步运用英语的能力，为实际应运打下扎实的基础。同时注重综合能力的开发、提高，培养他们的观察、思维、记忆、想象和创造等方面的能力;让学生了解中西方文化的差异，培养爱国主义精神，增强世界观意识，并结合课外学习，达到教学的最优秀性，培养学生良好的自学能力和习惯，并做到持之以恒，使本年段的英语教学能进一步发展、提高。
在这一学期中，主要培养学生学习英语的兴趣，继续培养学习英语的学习习惯，要很好地完成本学期的教学学习任务，重视阅读能力的培养，在实际教育工作中把做好学生思想工作放在学科教育的首位，通过师生的共同努力，为学科和学生本人再创佳绩。
八年级英语是人民教育出版社社出版的'新目标英语，教材编排有以下目的：
1.要使学生受到听、说、读、写、英语的训练，掌握最基础的语言知识和语言技能以及培养初步援用英语交际的能力;养成良好的外语学习习惯，掌握学习外语的基本方法;为进一步学习和运用英语打下扎实的基础。
2.使学生明确学习英语的目的性，
3.培养初步运用英语交际的能力和自学能力。
三、教材重点、难点
1、语音教学 本册课本在上册的基础上进一步学习和运用音标和单词的发音规则，着重抓好学生的预习，自学能力。
2、词汇教学 本册课本所要学习、掌握的单词约400个，另有固定搭配和习惯用语若干条，任务较重。
英语七年级上册课件范文
在教学过程中，老师教学的首要任务是备好教案课件，每个老师对于写教案课件都不陌生。教案是加强师生互动的重要方式。“英语七年级上册课件”之需求我们已经为您准备妥当，希望你更多关注本网站更新！
英语七年级上册课件 篇1
定语从句：
（一）基础：引导词---who, which, that, whom,练习1.I like cities___________are quiet and clean.2.I prefer students _________are hard-working.3.I hate TV shows _________ are noisy and boring.4.The music __________ is gentle and quiet attracts me a lot.5.The food __________tastes delicious is not always healthy.6.Those boys ___________ are playing basketballs over there are from Class Fifteen.7.The books ____________ are written by Lu Xun are worth reading.8.The town ___we visited last week is much larger than before.9.The book ___ he bought is very interesting.（二）特例：只用that的情况
1先行词被___________或___________所修饰，或本身是______________________时，只能用 that，2.被修饰的先行词为 ________________________________________________等不定代词时, 只能用 that.3.先行词被 _____________________________________________等词修饰时，只能用 that，而不用 which。
4.先行词里同时含有______________________，如I can remember well the persons and some pictures that I saw in the room.5.以______________________引导的特殊疑问句，只能用that.如： Who is the girl that is crying?
练习1.I am interested in everything___ is about the 2006 World Cup.2.Is there anything___I can do for you? 3.This is the very bike ______I lost
4.To my surprise, he gave me nothing __ I need.5.This is the best dictionary __ I have ever used.6.He was the first person _______passed the exam.7.He talked happily about the men and books________interested him greatly.（三）whose 1.The student ______father works in the factory is sitting there.2.I like the rooms ______windows face south.3.This is the desk ______legs were broken.4The woman ___ umbrella you took is angry about it.5.Here comes a girl ___ handwriting is the best.6The banana __skin is green can’t be eaten.7That tall tree _ leaves are yellow is very old.（四）从句谓语单复数由先行词确定，时态由从句时间状语决定，不必跟主句保持一致。
1-He is one of the boys who ____(doesn’t, don’t)finish doing homework.2-I like films which ____(be)exciting and interesting.3-Children who often ____(eat)junk food are easy to become fat and unhealthy.4-That boy who _____(run)fastest is from our class.5Those boys who ____ playing the guitar are from our school.(be)
6The trees which _____(be)watered yesterday belong to them.7The man who ____ over there is our teacher.(stand)8Those boys who ____ playing the guitar are from our school.(be)
9Mr.Brown is one of the foreign experts _______ _________(work)in China.10I’m one of the boys ______ ________(like)English best.(五)“介词＋关系代词”注意： 介词的选用要考虑：
A.与先行词的搭配关系
1）I will never forget the day __________ I joined the army.2)I will never forget the days ______ I worked here.3)I will never forget the year ____________ my son went to college.B.与谓语动词的搭配习惯
1）Have you found the book ________I paid 29 dollars?
2）Have you found the book ________I spent 29 dollars?
3)Have you found the book _____________we learnt a lot?
4)Have you found the book _______she often talks?
关系副词的用法
练习：1.It must be a good place ________________we can do a lot of exercise.2.This is the village _________________we visited last week.3.The house _______ we live in is very big./ The house _______ we live is very big
4.The woman ___________ talked to you just now is a doctor.The woman ______ you talked to is my sister.The woman to ___________ you talked is my sister.5.This is the hospital ____________ I was born in.This is the hospital in _________I was born.This is the hospital____________ I was born.综合练习一.用适当的关系代词或关系副词填空
1.The boy ______ is wearing the black jacket is very clever.2.This is the present ____he gave me for my birthday.3.The man _______ talked to you just now is an engineer.4.He talked about the teachers and schools _______ he had visited.5.There is nothing in the world ______can frighten him.6.We visited a factory _______makes toys for children.7.Is this the place _______ your father once lived 8.I’ll never forget the days _______ I joined the League.9The car______my father bought last month is beautiful.10The man______hair is white is his grandfather.二()1.Rosa likes music ___ is quiet and gentle.A.when B.that C.where D.who
()2.--Is the girl _ is interviewing the manager of that company your friend--Yes, she is a journalist from CCTV.A.whom B.which C.who D.whose
()3 Yao Ming is a famous basketball star ___ is playing in the NBA.A.whose B.who C.what D.which
()4.The doctor ___I am waiting for is Mr.Smith.A.which B.whom C.whose D.why
()5.---Do you know Hong Zhanhui?---Yes.He’s the college student ____ has moved Chinese people a lot.A.who B.which C.what D.whom
()6.In my family, my sister is the only person __ loves chocolate.A.which B.who C.whom D.she
()7.This is the place ____ the old man lived last year.A.when B.where C.that D.which
()8.The song ___ Jay Zhou sings are popular with students.A.why B.whom C.what D.which
()9.The farmer was very thankful to the doctor ___ treated his son.A.what B.which C.who D.whose
()10.I like to live in a house__ is big and bright.A.that B.who C.how D.why
()11.The young lady ___ we met yesterday is our new math teacher.A.what B.whose C.whom D.which
()12.--Can you introduce the town to me?--OK.This is the town in __ I was born.A.that B.who C.which
()13.Miss green is the only person __ can help you with your English.A.she B.whom C.which D.who
()14.I like the second football match ___was held last week.A.which B.who C.that D./
()15.Is there anything ____ to you? A.that is belonged B.that belongs C.that belong D.which belongs
()16.I hate people ___ don’t help others when they are in trouble.A.who B.which C.they
()17.This is the only book ___I am looking for.A.that B.which C.who D.whom
()18 Her sister__ you met at my home was a teacher of English.A.whom B.that is C.which D.who is
()19 The book__is sold out at the moment.A.you need Bwhat you need C.which you need it D that you need it
()20 I'm one of the boys ______never late for school.A.that is B.who are C.who am D.who is
()21.__cleans the classroom can go home first.A.Anyone B.Those who C.However D.The one who
()22.The old man __yesterday is a scientist.A.I spoke B.I spoke to C.whom I spoke D.that I spoke to him
中考定语从句真题演练
1.---Is the girl __ is interviewing the manager of that company your friend?--Yes, she is a journalist from CCTV.A.whom B.which C.who D.whose
2.Do you still remember the movie _____ we saw last weekend? A.who B.what C.that D.whom
3.---Who is your new English teacher?---Elena, the woman ____ is wearing a red T-shirt over there.A.不填 B.whom C.whose D.who
4.Is that the man _____ helped us a lot after the earthquake? A.whose B.which C.when D.who
5.---What are you looking for?---I’m looking for the pen ___ I bought yesterday.A.who B.which C.whose
6.This is the novel_____ written by Guo Jingming.A.who B.what C.that D./
7.We should be ready to help the people ____ are in trouble.A.whose B.whom C.which D.who
8.Two years has passed, but Chinese people still remember those exciting days ____ they spent during the Beijing 2008 Olympic Games.A.that B.who C.when
9.The magician _____ played magic tricks in 2008 CCTV Spring Festival Gala is Liu Qian.He is popular in China now.A.whose B.who C.which
10.July likes music very much.She likes music ____ she can dance to.A.what B.who C.that
11.At school, you should do the things _____ are allowed by the teachers.A.that B.when C.what
12.Thought is the key _____ opens the doors of the world.A.why B.where C.which D.who
13.The gentlemen ___ are coming to my office tomorrow are my classmates many years ago.A.whom B.who C.those D.which
14.That’s the man _____ house was destroyed in the storm.A.that B.whose C.who D.which
15.The girl ____ I just talked with is Ben’s sister.A.whom B.which C.she
16.I love people ____ are friendly to others.A.which B.whose C.what D.who
17.It’s time to say goodbye to my school.I’ll always remember the people _____ have helped me.A.who B.what C.which D.where
18.I like the teacher ____ classes are very interesting and creative.A.which B.who C.what D.whose
19.Do you know the boy ____ is sitting next to Peter?---Yes.He is Peter’s friend.They are celebrating his ____ birthday.A.who, ninth B.that, nineth C./, nineth D.which, ninth
20.ShaolinTemple__lies in the west of Zhengzhou welcomes the visitors from abroad.A.where B.which C.who
二宾语从句
1宾语从句的学习要注意三个方面
第一：语序：在宾语从句中，一律用___________。
如Where does she live?(Do you know?)----Do you know where she lives?
***几个特殊的特殊疑问句
Which is the way to the nearest shop?/ What’s wrong with you?/ What’s up?/ What’s the matter?
这几个特殊疑问句本身就是陈述语序,在宾语从句中不需调整语序。
第二：时态;1）如果主句是___________，宾语从句时态根据实际情况而定.如：1.It’s going to rain.I think.---I think it’s going to rain.2.“I will go with you.” he says.---He says he will go with me.3.He studied English ten years ago.I know.I know he studied English ten years ago.2）主句是___________，宾语从句要用___________。
如：It’s going to rain.I thought.---I thought it was going to rain.“I will go with you.” he said.---He said he would go with me.3).若从句表达的是___________，规律，不管主句是什么时态，从句都用___________。
如1 The earth turns round the sun.The teacher told us---The teacher told us that the earth turns round the sun.Light travels much faster than sound.She said …---She said that light travels much faster than sound.第三：连接词1)如果被连接的句子是___________，那么连接词用___________,(也可省)
如1.He’ll be back in a month.(I hear…)I hear(that)he will be back in a month.2.I have been to the Great Wall once.(He tells me…)He tells me(that)he has been to the Great Wall once.2.)如果被连接的句子是___________,则用连接词___________
如：*Does he live in that house?(She asked me …)She asked me if/ whether he lived in that house.*Have you finished your homework?(I want to know…)I want to know if you have finished your homework.3)___________句，用原句中的特殊疑问词引导：what, who, where, when, which, why, how(many/ much/ often/ long/ old).如： Who are you waiting for? Can you tell me?---Can you tell me who you are waiting for?
What did he do yesterday? I don’t know.---I don’t know what he did yesterday.***其中 以wh-疑问词或how 引导的宾语从句与动词不定式可相互转换
如I don’t know what I can do.可以说成 I don’t know what to do.The policeman showed me where I could get books.可以说成The policeman showed me where to get books.Can you tell me how I can make a kite?可以说成 Can you tell me how to make a kite?
4).宾语从句___________。在_________________________________等动词所跟的宾语中，如果从句谓语是否定的，一般要将否定词not转移至主句谓语上去，而将从句谓语改为肯定形式。如：I don’t think he has time to play with the girl.二．综合练习
1．I want to know __
A.whom is she looking after B.whom she is looking C．whom is she looking D．whom she is looking after
2．I don't know _________ the day after tomorrow．
A．when does he come B．how will he come C．if he comes D．whether he'll come
3．Could you tell me _________ the nearest hospital is？A．what B．how C．whether D．where
4．Could you tell me _________ the radio without any help？
A．how did he mend B．what did he mend C．how he mended D．what he mended
5．I don't know if he____ tomorrow.If he _____，I'll tell you．
A．comes, comes B．will come, will come C.will come, comes es, will come
6．Do you know where _________ now？A．he lives B．does he live C．he lived D．did he live
7．Do you know what time ___？A．the train leave B．does the train leave C．will the train leave Dthe train leaves
8．I don't know _________ ．Can you tell me，please？ A．how the two players are old
B．how old are the two players C．the two players are how old D．how old the two players are
9．The small children don't know _________ ． A．what is their stockings in
B．what is in their stockings C．where is their stockings in D．what in their stockings
10．I can't understand _________ ． A．what does Christmas mean B．what Christmas does mean
C．what mean Christmas does D．what Christmas means.When the job______, let me know.A.do B.done C.is done D.finished.She asked me if I knew__.A.whose pen is it B.whose pen it was C whose pen it is D.whose pen was it 13.Miss Li wants to know _____________next week.A.when my uncle leaves
B.when will my uncle leave C.where my uncle will stay D.where does my uncle uld you tell me ________________with the money ? A.how to do B.what should I do C.how I should do D.what I should do
中考宾语从句真题演练
()1.Everyone can play an important role in the society．As members，we should try our best to do__.A.what we should do B.what should we do C.how we should do
()2.--I really hope to keep in touch with Lily.--Sorry.I don't know __.A.what her name is B.what her job is C.what her number is D.when she left
()3 —Can you tell me ______? —By doing more speaking.A how I will improve my English
B.which way can I choose C.how do I deal with my English D.what’s wrong with my English
()4.How lovely the dog is!Can you tell me _____?
A.where did you get it B.where will you get it C.where you got it
()5..--Excuse me, could you tell me ____ the book about aliens?--Sure, take the escalator to the second floor.A.where I can buy B.where can I buy C.when can I buy D.when I can buy
()6-“Do you know_ have our summer holiday?”-“Next week.”A.when will we B.when are weC.when we will
()7---Do you know ____ the MP4 yesterday?--Sorry, I’ve no idea about it.A.how much did he pay for B.how much he paid for C.he paid for how much D.he paid how much for
()8--What time will Mr.Brown be back to China?--Sorry.I don’t know ___.A.when did he go abroad B.why he is going abroad C.how soon will he be back Dhow long he will stay abroad
（）9.You can’t image ___ when the pupils received these nice presents on Children’s Day.A.how they were excited B.how excited they were C.how excited were they D.they were how excited
（）10.–Can you tell me ______?–She is in the computer lab.A.where Linda was B.where is Linda C.where was Linda D.where Linda
()11.–Do you know _______ the Capital Museum? –Next Friday.A.when will they visit B.when they will visit C.when did they visit D.when they visited
()12.He wanted to know____the English party.A.when will we have B.when we will have C.when would we have D.when we would have
()13.I want to know_______.A.when we should arrive at the airport B.when should we arrive at the airport
C.when the airport we should arrive at D.when the airport should we arrive at
()14.–David, look at the man in white over there.Can you tell me_______? –He is a doctor.A.who is he B.who he is C.what is he D.what he is
()15.–Do you know___the girl in red is? –I’m not sure.Maybe a teacher.A.when B.how C.where D.what
()16.Your T-shirt is so uld you tell me ________?
A.where you buy it B.where do you buy it C.where you bought it D.where did you buy it is
()17.I really want to know ____.A.what is wrong with my brother
B.how will he go to Beijing tomorrow C.if had he bought that car D.where did he go yesterday
()18.Excuse me, uld you tell me ?
A.where is the bank nearestB.where is the nearest bankC.where the nearest bank isD.the nearest bank is where
()19.Lily’s mother looked for her for half an hour, but couldn’t find ____.A.What Lily was.B.What was Lily C.Where Lily was D.Where was Lily
()20--Could you tell me___? He is wanted by the head teacher.--Sorry, I’ve no idea.But he _ here just now．
A.where Tim was, was B.where is Tim，was C.where Tim is，was D．where Tim is，is
三、状语从句：
一）.条件状语从句：引导词为:if, unless。
形式：
主句_______________, 从句______________.练习：1.I am waiting for my friend.____________, I’ll do shopping alone.A.If she comes B.If she will come C.If she doesn’t come D.If she didn’t come
2.I am sure I can make it better, if our teacher _________me a second chance.A.give B.gave C.gives D.will give
3.The art club is for members only.You can’t go in___you are a member.A.unless B.Because C.if D.though
4.I ________the CDs to you if I have time tomorrow.A.will return B.returned C.have returned D.return
5.1）You won’t pass the final exam ___________(除非)you work hard.2)The children __________ climb the mountain if it __________________(不下雨)
3)_______________________if he comes.(给我打电话）
二）时间状语从句：(常见从属连词有when,before, after, until, as soon as, while…)
1）As soon as he _____in Paris, he will call you.A.arrive B.arrived C.arrives
2）Don’t leave until the rain_______.A.stopped B.stops C.stopping D.stop
3）You can go skating after you ____A.finish the job B.finished the job C.finishing the job
4)I’ll tell her the good news when he _____ back.A.came es e
5）Father was watching TV ________ Mum was washing dishes.A.before B.while C.after D.until
6）I was watching TV ____ you called me last night.A.when B.while C.until D.after
7)I ______ here since I came to China.d B.have lived C.am living D.had living
8).My grandma didn’t go to sleep______ I got back home.A.till B.until C.since D.when
三）原因状语从句：(常用连词有because, since, as)
1.Tom is ill at home, _____he can’t come here.A.so B.if C.because D.and
2.—Why did you come to school late this morning?--___I watched the Football World Cup until 12:00 last night.A.If B.Because C.Since D.Though
3.I hope to go to France some day__there are many museums there.A.though B.unless C.because D.where
四）结果状语从句：由so… that…/such…that/so that引导的从句（so后接形、副原级）
1）与too…to…句型的转换：
He ran so fast that I couldn’t catch up with him.=______________________________________________
The box is so heavy that I can’t carry it= ___________________________________________________
2）“so… that +从句”与“enough to”的替换
He’s so strong that he can carry the box.=___________________________________________________
He is not old enough to go to school.=________________________________________________________
3)so that…/ so…that…/such…that ____________________________________________________________
如：He got up early in the morning so that he could catch the early bus.The boy is so strong that he can lift up the heavy stone.He is such a clever boy that all of us like him.练习：1.--He was _______tired ______he fell asleep as soon as he lay down.--Oh, we can go out and let him have a good rest..A.too;to B.so;that C.enough;to D.such;that
2.There were _______many people ____I couldn’t find where she is.A.so;that B.so;as C.such;that D.as;that
3.He ran as fast as possible__he could reach school on time.A.in order to B so as to C such that D so that
4.They are ___interesting books __ I want to read them once more.A.so that B.such…that C.too…to D.so…that
综合练习
1.You may leave the classroom when you__writing.A.will finish Bare finishing C have finished Dhad finished
2.Would you give Johnny this letter if you ________ to see him this week.A.will happen B.happen C.are happened D.happened
3.She was busy, ____she couldn’t go to your birthday party last night.A.and B.so C.or D.but
4.English is ________ a useful language ________ it is spoken in many countries of the world.A.so…that B.such…that C.so…because D.such…because
5.Don’t cross the street __ the traffic lights are green.A.after B.until C.while D.since
6.Your dream won’t come true__ you know what your dream is.A.after B.unless C.while D.since
7.--Could you ask him if he __to my birthday party next Sunday? –I will, if I __ him this afternoon.es, meet B.will come, will meet es, will meet D.will come, meet
8.Sarah is ______ a hard-working girl ______ she often works late into night.A.so;that B.too;to C.such;that D.not only;but also
状语从句真题练习
1.—Where was your brother at this time last night?—He was writing an e-mail ___I was watching TV at home.A.as soon as B.after C.until D.while
2.The film “Kung Fu Panda” is___interesting__I would like to see it again.A.such,that B.too,to C.as,as D.so that
3.Tom will call me as soon as he ___home.A.gets B.has got C.got D.will get
4.We will have no water to drink___we don’t protect the earth.A.until B.before C.though D.if
5.We won’t start the meeting ___our teacher arrives.A.though B.until C.while D.or
6.Bob promises to join in the football match____he has to help his parents on the farm..A.if B.as C.unless D.when
7.___it’s difficult to make her dream come ture, she never gives up.A.Though B.Unless C.Because D.If
8.---Could you tell me when Mr.Li___in Huanggang?---Sure.When he ___, I’ll call you.A.arrives;will arrive B.will arrive;arrives C.arrives;arrives D.will arrive;will arrive
9.In summer, food goes bad easily__it is put in the refrigerator.A.until B.if C.unless
10.A moment, please.I’m checking if Mr.Smith__free tomorrow.A.is B.being C.to be D.will be
11.I didn’t go to bed __my mother came back late last night.A.so;B.until C.though
12.Hurry up,___you will miss the early train.A.or B.and C.if D.unless
13.---Tommy, do you know if Frank___to the theatre with us this Sunday if it ___?---Sorry, I have no idea.A.will go, is fine;B.goes, is fine C.will go, is going to be fine D.goes;will be fine
14.What a beautiful painting it is!I’ve never seen ___painting.A.such a B.a C.such D.this better
15.I don’t know __he will come tomorrow.___he comes, I’ll tell you.A.if, Whether B.whether, Whether C.if, That D.if, If
复合句综合检测
()1.Is this museum_ they visited last month? A.that B.where C.which D.the one
()2.Is that book ____ he borrowed on Friday? A.that B.which C.who D.the one
()3 The second book__I want to read is Business at the Speed of Thought.A.which B.what C.that D.as
()4 –Do you know the man __is running along the street? A who B which C whom
()5.Without friendship, one can’t be happy although he is rich enough.As for me, I will never forget the days ___I spent with my dearest friend.A that B when C who
()6 This is the best TV play __we have seen this year.A when B what C who D that
()7--Have you found the information about famous people ____you can use for report?
--Not yet.I’ll search some on the Internet.A which B who C what D whom
()8--Have you been to the Sports Center___ is just opened in town?--No, no yet.A where B who C that D when
()9--Bob, where do you work?--I work for a company ___sells cars.A which B where C what
()10____ have finished the work can leave.A.Those who B.Anyone C.The one who
()11.The building that ___new is our school.A.is B.are C.was D.were
()12.The pandas that we saved ____better now.A.are B.were C.is D.was
()13 This is the only thing _________ I have lost.A.which B.that C.where
()14.--Could you tell me____?--Sorry, I don’t know.I was not at the meeting.A.what does he say at the meeting.B what did he say at the meeting.C.what he says at the meeting D.what he said at the meeting
()15.No one can be sure____ in a million years.A.what man looks like B.what will man look like C.man will look like what D.what man will look like
()16.--Could you tell me ____?--She is a student in Eton School.A.where Kate is studying B.how Kate studies C.why Kate was studying D.when Kate studied
()17.--Could you tell me___ yesterday?--About two hours.A.How long it takes to fly to Guilin B.How long it took to fly to Guilin C.How long does it take to fly to Guiln D.How long did it take to fly to Guilin
()18.Please tell me____.A.what is wrong with the boy B.what is the boy wrong C.what wrong the boy is
()19.She will hate him when she _more about him.A.knowsB.know C.will know Dis going to know
()20.--Excuse me.Do you know_____?--Sorry, I don’t know.A.where is No.1 Middle School
B.where No.1 Middle School is C.No.1 Middle School is where D.No.1 Middle School where is
()21.At the science museum，the boys and girls get to know__________.A.what is the spaceship like
B.what the spaceship looks like C.how the spaceship looks 1ike D.how does the spaceship1ook like
()22.He didn’t tell me ____.A.which floor did he live on B.which floor he lived on C.which floor he lived D.he lived on which floor
()23.I’m new uld you tell me__, please?A.when does the first bus arrive B.when the first bus arrives
C.when did the first bus arrive D.when will the first bus arrive
()24.I wonder how long_______school?
A.has he been away from B.he has been away C.he has left D.he has been away from
()25.---We can use MSN to talk with each other on the Internet.---Really? Will you please show ____it? ‘
A.what to use B.how to use C.how can I use D.where can I use
()26.The teacher asked the students.A.if they were interested in chatting online
B.when was Albert Einstein born C.what they will do with the computers D.how often they go to movies
()27---Could you tell me how long __the book?--Three days.A.I can keep B.can I borrow C.I can borrow D.can I keep
()28.I can’t understand ___the boy alone at home.A.why she left B.did she leave C.why had she left D.why she leave
()29.You will not succeeded if you ______ harder.A.will work B.won’t work D.don’t work
()30.Write clearly __your teacher can understand you correctly.A.since B.for C.because Dso that
()31.______he failed , he went on doing the experiment.A.Even B.Yet C.Although D.in spite of
()32.The dog went out while we __ supper.A.had B.had had C.were having D.would have
()33.His brother has worked there ________ he left schoo A.when B.after C.since D.until
()34.The boy didn’t stop talking ____the second bell rang.A.when B.until C.after D.because
()35.__I came into the office, the teacher were having a meeting.A.While B.When C.Once D.Since
()36.I was about to leave my house __ the telephone rang.A.while B.as C.when D.since
七年级上册英语人教版篇一：人教版英语+七年级上册各单元知识点详解
StarterUnit1Goodmorning.1.Goodmorning/afternoon/evening早上（上午）/下午/晚上好。答语相同。在熟人或家人之间可省略good.熟人之间的问候可加上称呼语，称呼语放在问候语之后且用逗号隔开。如：Goodmorning,class!同学们，早上好！△Goodnight!晚安（晚间告别用语）2.Hello,Frank!你好，弗兰克。
3.A;Ho上午pm下午cm厘米mm毫米11.英语句子的书写
句子开头的第一个单词的第一个字母要大写，单词与单词之间要有适当的距离，一般为放入一个字母的空隙，句末要有标点符号，英语的句号是个实心圆点，而不是汉语中的小圆圈。12.大写字母的用法
1）英语句子开头的第一个字母必须大写。
2）I（我），OK在句中任何位置都大写。
3）人名、地名、国名、某国人或某种语言等专有名词的第一个字母必须大写。
4）电影名、书名、报刊、文章的标题等中的每个实词（如：名词、动词、形容词、副词、数词）的第一个字母一般大写。EnglishWeekly《英语周报》Titanic《泰坦尼克号》5）表示月份、星期、重要节日的名词的第一个字母必须大写。6）某些缩略词的第一个字母都必须大写。
7）表示称呼的名词的第一个字母通常要大写。UncleWang王叔叔
14.英语句子成分
一、主语（subject）:句子说明的人或事物。
1.Thesunrisesintheeast.太阳从东方升起。（名词）2.Helikesdancing.他喜欢跳舞。（代词）
3.Tovie去看电影
2、助动词do/does的用法。
3、Whatkind(of)用来问种类:Whatkind(ofmovie)doyoulike?
4、too,ase你的名字firstname名字lastname姓氏hername她的名字
telephone/phonenumber电话号码inChina在中国
2.必背典句：
1.—nicetomeetyou!见到你很高兴！
—Nicetomeetyou，too.见到你我也很高兴。
2.—What’syourname?你的名字是什么？
—Alan.艾伦
3.I’mJenny我是珍妮。
4.What’shis/hername?他的/她的名字是什么？
5.Hername’sMary.她的名字是玛丽。
6.What’syourfirst/lastname?你的名字/姓氏是什么？
7.—What’shistelephonenumber?他的电话号码是多少？
—It’s876-9548是876-9548.3.形容词性物主代词
物主代词是表示所有关系的代词，是人称代词的属格形式。它分第一人称、第二人称和第三
人称，每个人称又分单数和复数。物主代词分形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词。
形容词性物主代词的用法和形容词的用法相似，具有形容词的性质。在句中作定语，(转载于:eC.myD.mine
(2011年河北)Georgereadsthenewspapereverymorning.That’shabit.A.heB.himC.hisD.himself
(四川南充中考)SheisastudentandnameisKate.A.sheB.herC.hers
4.be动词用法
(1)be动词（am,is,are）这三个动词常用做连系动词，在句子中起连接主语和表语的作用。
Thisismymother.这是我的妈妈。
Iamnine.我九岁了。
Youaremygoodfriend.你是我的好朋友。
(2)be动词三种形式的使用主要取决于主语。主语是第一人称I（我）时，用am,主语是第二
人称you（你，你们）或名词及代词的复数时，用are,主语是第三人称单数it/he/she（它/
他/她）或名词及代词单数时，用is.(3)am,is,are的意思是“是”，但不能处处翻译成“是”。例，Howareyou?你好吗？
5.What引导的特殊疑问句
英语中用于提出疑问的句子叫疑问句，以what等特殊疑问词开头的句子叫特殊疑问句，用
法如下：
（1）询问姓名，—What’syourname?你的名字是什么？—Alan.艾伦。
（2）询问某物用英语怎么说。—What’sthisinEnglish?—It’satelephone.这是一部电话。
（3）询问电话号码。—What’syourtelephone/phonenumber?你的电话号码是多少？
—It’s563-4789.是5634789.6.基数词的用法。
数词分为两大类：基数词和序数词，表示“多少”的为基数词；表示“第几”的为序数词。
基数词有zero,one,two等。序数词我们刚学了一个“first”（第一）。其中基数词的用法如下：
（1）表示数字、年龄、日期等，在剧中可作主语、定语和表语。—What’stwoandfive?二加上五等于几？
—Seven七（表示数字）
—Howoldisit?它几岁了？
—It’sfour.它四岁了。（表示年龄）
—What’sthedatetoday?今天几月几日？
—It’sOctober3.10月3日。（表示日期）
（2）表示编号：LessonOne第一课UnitOne第一单元
（3）表示号码，如电话号码、门牌号、身份证号等，按单个基数词读出。0可以读成字母o的读音或zero，相连的相同两位数可以读成double(双写的)＋基数词。
（4）表示时刻：8:：00＝eighto’clock8点钟
7.汉语名字在英语中的写法
中国人名是姓在前，名在后。姓和名的首字母都要大写且中间空一格，若名为两个字，中间
不加空格，只需第一字的首字母大写。ZhangLing张玲LiuYifei刘亦菲
英语七年级上册课件 篇2
人教版英语七年级上册Unit7 How much are these socks? Section A 1a-1c说课稿
新堡初级中学
石勇亮
一、教材分析
1.教材的地位、作用及前后联系：
新目标英语七年级上册第7单元第一课时（1a-1c）。
话题：询问价格，贴近学生的日常生活。
与Starter Unit3辨认颜色以及Unit 6谈论好恶联系紧密，学习询问价格的同时可以复习巩固之前的知识。
2.教学内容：
课题：How much are these socks ? 话题：“ask about prices”。目标语言：
--How much is „?
--it’s„
--How much are „?
--They are„
3.教学目标 ①知识目标
词汇：socks
shorts sweater trousers
jacket
skirt 句型：--How much is this T-shirt?
--It’s seven dollars.--How much are these socks?
--They are two dollars..②能力目标：掌握用how much„句型来询问价格，让学生能够利用简单的英语进行购物，培养学生的听说读写能力。③情感目标：
(1)树立正确的消费观念，养成节约用钱的生活习惯；(2)知道人民币与美元的差别，了解中西方的文化差异。4.教学重点与难点
我把名词单复数的应用和如何在现实生活中询问东西的价格确定为本节课的重点与难点。为了突破难点，教学中利用了大量的图片、实物，给学生提供非常直观的感性认识。
二、学情分析
农村学生学英语起步晚，怕犯错。在教学中努力营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围，积极鼓励他们大胆尝试，保护他们的自尊心和积极性。抓住七年级学生活泼、好动、好胜心强的特点，引进小组竞争机制，倡导其参与活动。
三、教法分析
1、情景引入法:利用多媒体创设情景，引入新知。吸引学生注意力，使他们对即将学习的新知识产生好奇。
2、听说法：对目标语言进行反复操练，以达到灵活运用的目的。
3、任务型教学法：设计一系列的任务活动，让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握目标语言。
四、学法分析 1.分组合作学习。2.“为用而学，用中学，学了就用”：本课时的目标语言是询问事物的价格，与学生实际生活联系紧密，所以应该充分利用创造的情景和实物给与学生练习英语口语的机会。
五、教学过程设计
Step1、Warm up and Lead in:
1、创设情境，引入新单词
socks shorts sweater T-shirt trousers jacket
skirt
2、复习学过的句型
What’s this ∕that in English?
What color is it?
3、注意名词的单复数 a pair of trousers/shorts/socks two pairs of trousers/shorts/socks Step2、练习、巩固新单词，完成活动1a、1b Step3、教授、练习新句型，完成活动1C
将dollar与人民币单位yuan相比较，注意dollar的单复数变化。
此环节中结合图片设计师生对话、结对活动、句子接龙等任务，让学生分小组竞赛，练习巩固新句型。在练习的过程中，将重点句型How much is it?发散为How much are they?重点掌握单复数在此句型中的变化。Step4.综合运用
How much is that red hat? It’s 6 dollars.How much are your white trousers？
They are 10 dollars.加大句子难度继续操练，巩固新词汇和句型。
此环节将表示颜色的形容词带入操练句型中，并结合学生穿的毛衣、裤子、身边的尺子、书包、铅笔、橡皮擦擦等物品让学生自己编对话。Step5、总结回顾 词汇：sock
T-shirt
shorts
sweater
trousers
shoe skirt
dollar
2、句型：--How much is this T-shirt?
--It’s 7 dollars.--How much are these socks?--they are 2 dollars.Homework: Ask about prices of your deskmate’s clothing, and write down your conversations.询问你同桌衣物的价格，并将你们的对话写下来。Step6、板书设计
Unit 4 How much are these socks?
(Section A
1a – 1c)Clothing
jacket
A: How much is this T-shirt? a pair of socks
B: It’s seven dollars.two pairs of trousers
A: How much are these socks? Shorts shoes skirt sweater
B: They are two dollars.
英语七年级上册课件 篇3
有的学生对小学英语比较重视，学得很好；但有的学生或学校不重视，学得很不好，还有几个甚至完全没有学过。有的学生笔试不错，但语音、语调、书写都有待加强。因此，整个班级的英语水平很不平衡，给日常教学带来诸多的不便，提高了难度。
学生刚刚从小学进入初中，处于一个衔接的阶段，学习任务加重，学习的习惯不是很好，没有形成一定的适合自己的方法，都有待改善。
总之，既要避免好生吃不饱的现象，又要努力把目前英语有欠缺的学生拉上去，激发他们的兴趣和信心，赶上中上的水平学生。在今后的教学中应该注重培养、激发兴趣，教给学生学习的方法，从学生的学习兴趣、学习能力、生活经验和认知水平出发，倡导体验、实践、参与与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径，发展学生的综合语言运用能力，使语言的学习过程成为学生形成积极的情感态度、主动思维和大胆实践、提高跨文化意识和形成学生自主学习能力的过程，这是新课标和新目标英语的要求。
The goal:
The goal of Go for it is to make language a step-by-step progression that builds confidence and leads to open-ended activities where students can actively relate learning to their personal lives.
Go For It! 是以《英语课程标准》为依据，以学生的英语语言综合运用能力为目标。不仅以语言知识、语言技能为重点，而且更注重学生的学习策略、情感态度和文化意识。教学内容的处理和取舍灵活开放， 只要教师从学生的实际水平和语言能力出发，任何教学内容的调整或取舍，任何教学步骤的安排都是可行的。“I sometimes go to the last to do the group work first…It depends on the teachers’ knowledge of the students actual language ability…”(David Nunan)；提倡教师结合学生实际，充分利用学生、教师本身和环境中一切可以利用的资源，丰富教学内容，创造运用英语的机会，注意多渠道开发教学资源。 “Don’t use just the textbook. Anything in real life that connect and appropriate to the lesson can be used as teaching resources.”(David Nunan)；提倡任务型语言教学，教学进度整体把握，教学形式不拘一格；课堂以学生为主体，以任务为主线，重视体验参与，课后访谈调查，读写扎记，重视语言运用；正视个体差异，倡导过程激励，以多层次、多角度、多主体的结果与过程并重的评价方式激励进步。
The key points of each unit:
U 1 Making new friends Introduce yourself
Ask for and give telephone numbers Present tense to be
Prossessive adjectives:my,your,his,her
Identify ownerships Demonstratives:this,that
What questions and Yes/No questions
How do you spell pen?
Identify people Demonstratives:these,those
U4 Things around the house Talk about where things are Where questions and Yes/No questions
U5 Spending time with friends Ask and answer questions about ownership
Make suggestions Present tense to have
Yes/No questions and short answers: let’s
Food Talk about likes and dislikes Present tense to like
Yes/No questions and short answers
Affirmative and negative statements
Thank someone Demonstratives:this,that,these,those
Dates Talk about dates When questions
Prossessive “s”
Make plans Present tense to want
Yes/No questions and short answers:
U10 Joining a club Talk about abilities Modal verb can
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Affirmative and negative statements
U11 Daily routines Talk about daily routines
Ask about and say times When questions
What time is it?
U 12 School subjects Talk about preferences
新目标任务型教学的特色理念：《新目标英语》是以任务为基础的语言教学，在教材的设计上，遵循了自然言语、情境真实性、语言形式为交流功能性服务、层层深入阶梯型发展语言能力、在做中学等最新教学原则和理念，注重引导学生体会文化差异，培养学生自主学习能力，完全符合教育部的《义务教育阶段英语课程标准》的要求。本教材的教学理念：“知识用于行动”，强调“语言应用”，培养“创新、实践能力”，发展“学习策略”。
人教社《新目标英语》教材的.几大特色：
A. 图文并茂。一幅副充满情趣，幽默生动的画面，令你眼睛一亮。它不仅版面设计充满新意，而且在内容和结构方面更富有创意 更具时代感，更有现代气息，更加贴近学生的生活。学生一拿到课本后都爱不释手，迫不及待地翻阅。
B. 实用性强。每个单元的选材都来源于学生的学习和生活。紧紧地与学生的年龄特征、认知结构、生活经验联系在一起。如第一册的十四个话题：认识新朋友、教室里的物品、家庭成员、食品、购物、电影、参加社团、生活习惯、学习科目、国家与语言。第二册的十二个话题：邻居、动物、足球、职业、周末活动、音乐、人物性格与外貌、天气、节日、度假与休闲、流行文化、规章制度与日常生活。由于这些都是学生熟悉的话题，生活中经常碰到的事情，所以学生容易接受，学习热情自然也高。使教学活动由“要我学”转变为“我要学”。
C.注重交际。针对中国学生学英语普遍存在的“聋哑病”，教材设计了大量的听说读写材料。每个单元都有语言活动，且内容不同，形式多样，学生对这些活动充满兴趣，所以大家都能情绪高昂地参加pair work, group work, games等活动。学生们充满了自信，开心地练习说英语，教室里常常充满了欢歌笑语。同学们都喜欢上英语课，他们能为学以致用而感到兴奋，同时也体验到了学习语言的快乐。
D.词汇量大。第一册有词汇700个左右，第二册约450个，第三册约450个，第四册约400个， 第五册约500个，合计2500个。这一点正好达到《英语课程标准》5级的要求。大大丰富了学生的词汇量，让学生能更好地表达自己的所思所想。同时也要求学生必须采取有效的记忆单词的方法，就会事半功倍，否则难以适应教材的要求。这时学生特别需要教师的指导 .。
a.言语、情境真实性原则 (The authenticity principle)
任务的设计要提供给学习者明确、真实的语言信息。语言情境、语言形式等要符合交际的功能和规律。使学习者在一种自然、真实或模拟真实的情境中体会语言、掌握语言的应用。
b.形式-功能性原则 (The form-function principle)
任务的设计注重语言形式和语言功能的结合。形式-功能性原则，旨在使学习者掌握语言形式的同时，培养其自我把握语言功能的能力；每一阶段任务的设计都具有一定的导入性，学生在学习语言形式的基础上，通过系列任务的训练，能够自己进行推理和演绎，从而理解语言的功能，并在交际中进行真实运用。
c.阶梯型任务原则 (The task dependency principle)
学习单元中任务的设计由简到繁，由易到难，层层深入，并形成由初级任务到高级任务并由高级任务涵盖初级任务的循环。在语言技能方面，遵循先听、读，后说、写的设计顺序，使教学阶梯式地层层递进。
自始至终引导学生通过完成具体的任务活动来学习语言，让学生为了特定的学习目的去实施特定的语言行动，通过完成特定的交际任务来获得和积累相应的学习经验。
1．利用直观教具和教学辅助媒体，激发兴趣，增加容量，整体优化课堂教学。
2．每日进行单词竞赛。
3．学唱英文歌。
4．坚持值日生报告。
Week 2 Starter Unit 2& Starter Unit 3 5课时
英语七年级上册课件 篇4
Unit 4 Where’s my schoolbag?说课稿 第一课时（Section A 1a-1c）
说课教师 ：Crystal 大家好！
今天我说课的内容是人教版新目标英语七年级上册的第四单元Unit 4 Where’s my schoolbag?下面，我将从以下几个方面进行说课。
一、说教材
本单元主要内容是谈论物品的位置。通过询问物品的位置，学生们将学习一些有关家居物品的单词，以及on、in、under等方位介词的用法，学习并掌握where引导的特殊疑问句及其答语。学习人称代词they的用法。使学生学会基本句型“Where’s/ Where’re..? It’s/ They’re on/in/under...”学会运用方位介词“on/in/under”来表达物品的位置。通过以上的学习，使学生学会运用听关键词、推测词意的学习策略，识别不同物品的位置。这样既能让学生了解自己的家居环境，热爱自己的家，又能促使学生通过想象来设计自己理想中的房间和对好的生活习惯的重新认识。
二、说学情
本课的对象是刚进初中不久的七年级新生，他们好动、好奇、好表现，有部分学生小学并没有学过英语，他们对英语有着极大的兴趣和好奇心。教师应该抓住这个有利因素，注重对学生学习英语兴趣的培养，保持他们强烈的好奇心和旺盛的求知欲。因此，教师在教学过程中要精心设计各种教学活动，积极采用新颖、丰富多彩的教学手段来激发学生的学习兴趣，用兴趣来激活他们的思维能力，唤起他们的学习注意力，进而充分调动学生的学习积极性和主动性，让他们积极参与到教学中去。另一方面要创造条件和机会，让学生有机会表现自己，享受成功的喜悦，从而增强他们对英语学习的自信心，在学习过程中发展综合语言应用能力。让他们真正成为一堂课的主人。七年级英语教学是整个初中英语教学的基础，让学生迈好英语学习的第一步，对培养学生学习英语的能力和促进学生的个性发展有着很大的帮助。
三、说教学目标 知识目标：
1、学习和掌握有关询问物品位置的句型：
Where’s my schoolbag? It’s on/in/under/behind/next to the chair.2、学习和掌握有关家具类的单词：table, bed, bookcase, keys，books , sofa ,chair ,schoolbag
3、学会三个方位介词的用法：on ,in , under 能力目标：学会询问物品的位置和确认物品的位置；能够运用所学知识进行简单的会话。
情感目标：培养爱整洁的习惯和帮助他人的优良品德。
四、说教学重难点 重点：
1、熟练拼写和运用家居物品名称：where, table, chair, bed, bookcase, sofa, chair, on, under等词。
2、通过使用方位介词“on/in/under”表达物品的位置及学习“Where……”和“It’s……的用法，使学生学会运用特殊疑问句和陈述句。难点：
Where问句和方位介词on，in，under的用法。
五、说教法
在整个教学过程中我采用情景教学法、多媒体辅助教学法、合作学习法、小组竞赛法、交际法和任务驱动式教学法等教学方法进行教学。通过设置一些情景，让学生自己完成任务来学习知识、掌握技能。这种方法对于培养学生分析问题、解决问题的能力，激发和维持学生的学习积极性等有着独特的优势。因此，在教学过程中，我所要求学生掌握的内容都是通过一个个任务来进行，由易到难，由简到繁，让学生在不知不觉完成任务的过程中学到知识以兴趣吸引人，以情感培育人，以评价激励人、以活动促进人。
六、说教学过程 Step1.Warming up T:Good morning, everyone！Ss: Good morning，Miss Zhan！T:How are you today？ Ss: Fine, thinks.And you? T:I’m fine, too.Step2:Lead in Now, look at me.What’s this in English? Ss: It’s a pen.T:Very good.together, read twice.Step3：Teach the new words 通过图片展示来学习新单词，同时引出句型“Where’s my schoolbag? It’s…” T:Where’s the schoolbag? Ss:It’s under the table?(引导学生回答)T: Where’s the pencil box? Ss: It’s on the desk.T: Where’s the baseball? Ss: It’s in the drawer.根据1a图，引出复数句型。Where are …? They’re …? T:Where are the books ? Ss:They’re on the sofa ?(引导学生回答)T: Where are the keys? Ss:They’ re on the table.接着板书呈现句型，让学生对比这两个单复数句型的用法。Step4:Listening Practice 1b 播放1b部分的录音让学生听，引导学生写出所听到的单词的号码，完成1b部分的听力任务。Step5： Pair work 让学生小组合作共同探究完成1c部分口语交际的教学任务，学会运用“Where’s my schoolbag? It’s under the chair.” 的对话及方位介词“on/in/under/behind”目标句型来表达物品的位置。Step6： Guess Game 设计一个猜谜游戏，比如把不同的物体放在不同的位置，让学生来猜，在找寻物体的过程中来巩固今天所学的内容。Step7：Summary 教师带着学生总结本课重点学习了哪些词汇、句型。Step8：Homework 1.画出自己的小房间，为其中的物品标上英文，物品越多越好。2.抄写新单词和重点句型。
板书设计：
Unit4 Where‘s my schoolbag？
Word： Sentences：
table chair bed Where‘s my schoolbag？ It’s under the chair.Sofa clock tape Where is his pencil？ It is in his schoolbag.Desk pencil Where are the keys? Ss:They’ re on the table.where schoolbag Where are my books on in under behind.？ They’re on the sofa
英语七年级上册课件 篇5
Unit 4 Where's my schoolbag？
Section A 1a1c
Words Sentences
chair
sofa
bed
table
bookcase
... —Where's my schoolbag？
—It's under the table.
—Where are my books？
—They're on the sofa.
(整洁和有条理的板书设计，有利于学生对本课知识有一个系统性的认识，同时培养学生有条理和爱整洁的习惯。)
备课资料
知识讲解
1．—Where's my schoolbag？我的书包在哪里？
—It's under the table.在桌子下面。
★这是一个由疑问副词Where引导的特殊疑问句。where “在哪里、哪儿”，通常用来询问某人或某物在什么地方。对于特殊疑问句，我们不能用“Yes”和“No”回答，而要用一个陈述句或短语来作出明确的回答。例如：
—Where's Tom？汤姆在哪儿？
—He is here.他在这儿。
2．介词 on、in 和under
★1)on表示表面上的接触，一个在另一个的上面，即“在……的上面”。
如：An apple is on the table.苹果在桌子上。
Are his keys on the chair？他的钥匙在椅子上吗？
2)in表示“在……里”，无论在大的范围内还是在小的范围内，都要用in。
如：—Where is your eraser？你的橡皮在哪里？
—It's in my pencil box.在我的铅笔盒里。
The book is in your schoolbag.那本书在你的书包里。
3)under表示“在……下”，指在某物垂直的下方。
如：The baseball is under the desk.棒球在桌子下面。
A chair is under the tree.一把椅子在树下。
★介词短语是由“介词＋(冠词)＋名词”组成的短语，有特定的意义，可以在句中作定语修饰名词，也可以在句中作状语修饰动词。本单元出现的是作状语的介词短语。如：
on the desk/floor/wall/hill/tree/playground/bed/bike 在桌子/地板/墙/山/树/操场/床/自行车上
★介词表示方位时，不要忘掉系动词“be”。
英语七年级上册课件 篇6
知识目标：
(1)复习Wh-questions。
(2)学生收集朋友的有关信息特别是人物的外貌描写。
(3)学生能用不同的句型来介绍个人信息，如：My…’snameis…;His/Her favourite hobbyis…;He/She is…years old,…centimetershigh.He/She lives in…etc。
技能目标：(1)听说――学生能从听力中抓住描述人物的信息。(2)写――学生能把听到的信息正确地填入表格。
I Sing a song.
II.Duty report(Ask the students some Wh-questions about the duty reporter)
1.Get ready for the listening.
Pay attention to the words:length n.长度,height n.高度,birth n.出生,blond adj.金色的.
2.Explain how to do the two parts of the listening.
A.Fill in the blanks in the table for the first time to listen.
B.Write the numbers 1-4 under the correct photos for the second time to listen.
3.Read the dialogues after finishing the listening.Pay attention to the Wh-questions.
IV.Practice in pairs.
1.Practice the dialogues in pairs.
You:What colour is your hair?
Your deskmate:It’s_________(brown).
You:How long is your hair?
Yourdeskmate:It’s_________(very long).
You:What colour are your eyes?
Yourdeskmate:_____________(Brown).
Yourdeskmate:I’m___________(155)cmtall.
Yourdeskmate:I am from_________(theUK).
You:What’s your favourite sport?
Yourdeskmate:_____________(Tennis).
You:What’s your best subject?
2.Then fill in the information in the table.
3.Introduce your deskmate to the class
My deskmate is______________.He/She is____________.
He/She has________________hairand___________eyes.
His/Her favourite hobby is____________
His/Her best subject is_____________.
And he/she wants to be_____________.
Describe one of your favorite teachers in our school!
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
英语七年级上册课件 篇7
七年级上册英语Unit7第一课时教学设计
宜君县第二中学 王娟
一、设计思路
本节课教授的词汇主要是服饰类的，课型属于听说课。所以在课前先营造一种轻松的学习氛围，教唱一首英语歌曲，让学生尽快地融入进课堂，期间还有pair work，groupwork，把学生分成两两小组或四人小组，互相对话。这样的活动要进行两次，可以提供给学生充分的时间进行交流。
二、教材分析
本节课是第七单元的第一课时，学生在前一单元初步学习完有关食物的英语知识之后，进一步地在本单元学习有关服饰的知识。而本课时是第一课时，所授的知识点应该浅显易懂，不应该太难。本课时围绕着几个关于服饰的词汇和两个询问价钱的句型展开。
三、教学目标
（一）教学知识点
(1)New words：T-shirt，sweater，bag，hat，skirt，socks，shorts，pants，shoes，(2)Questions and answers：How much is/are…？It’s/They are…dollars.（二）能力训练要求
(1)通过师生对话,生生对话等一系列活动,提高学生实际运用英语的能力。(2)体会合作学习所带来的快乐。
（三）情感与价值观要求
通过学生互相帮助，互相学习，体验集体荣誉感和成就感，发展合作精神。
四、教学重点和难点 重点：
(1)学会重点词汇的发音，单复数形式的掌握。(2)学会询问价钱的英语句型及其回答。难点：
(1)表示大小，颜色的形容词同时出现在名词前时，该如何摆放。(2)听力2a前，如何充分铺垫，以便于学生跟上录音速度。
五、教学策略与手段(1)师生对话，生生对话。(2)充分运用现代教育技术手段。
六、教学过程
（一）、课前热身：教唱英语歌曲 color song Who is wearing yellow today?
yellow today, yellow today Who is wearing yellow today?
yellow today.Who is wearing red today?
red today, red today Who is wearing red today?
red today Who is wearing green today?
green today, green today Who is wearing green today?
green today Who is wearing blue today?
blue today, blue today Who is wearing blue today?
blue today Who is wearing black today?
black today, black today Who is wearing black today?
black today Who is wearing white today?
white today, white today Who is wearing white today?
white today Who is wearing pink today?
pink today, pink today Who is wearing pink today?
pink today 设计意图：为了给学生营造一种轻松愉快的学习氛围，尽快融入到所教知识中去，也可以为接下来的颜色的教学作铺垫。
（二）、导入新课：
(1)媒体图片，教授学生新单词。T-shirt，sweater，bag，hat，skirt，socks，shorts，pants，shoes，然后完成书本P41的活动1a.设计意图：这一步是为了让学生为接下来的口语活动打下基础，有话可说。
(2)生走进一家虚拟的服装店，让学生根据所学单词，进行结对活动，学会提问：How much is/are…? 以及回答:It’s/They’re…dollars.设计意图：目的是给学生创设半真实的情景，在这样的情景下呈现新的句型能让学生更容易理解和接受。在结对活动之前，先让个别学生操练重点句型以作示范，以使全班同学都能理解并准确地操练新的语言点。
3(3)卡片教授颜色：red，green，yellow，orange，white，black，blue…
设计意图：为了教会学生用一个或多个形容词来描述物品，使其语言更加丰富。
(4)服饰大调查: ①以四人一组为单位,对本组同学所穿服装颜色和价格进行问答② 根据回答做记录并填好表格;③挑选几位同学向全班汇报记录的情况。
设计意图：在一堂课结束的时候安排这么一个活动，目的是让学生把本堂课学过的知识点串联起来，能使他们更加自由地交谈，并且有更多地时间运用所学的新单词，新句型进行对话，通过观察还能提高他们的审美观。
（三）、课堂小结
(1)今天这堂课你学到了什么？(2)你有那些收获？请同学们谈谈。
（四）、课后作业：两人或三人合作编一个在商店购物的对话.
七年级英语上册课件9篇
教案课件是老师上课做的提前准备，因此在写的时候就不要草草了事了。写好教案课件，可以避免老师遗忘重要内容，你是否在寻找合适的教案课件呢？本篇文章是趣祝福在网络上精心整理的“七年级英语上册课件”，如果您认为这篇文章有价值还请收藏这篇文章！
七年级英语上册课件 篇1
课前准备
教师：准备游戏时所用的图片（食物、蔬菜、动物）。
学生：准备表演时所需道具（服装、假发）。
教学设计
Step One :Present the sentence patterns.1.Play a game “How many words do you know?”(利用小游戏调动学生的积极性，同时通过对冠军的介绍引出本课。)
Teacher: After the study of the first three starters, I think most of the students must have known a lot of words.How many words do you know? Let’s play a game to see who know? Let’s play a game to see who knows the most.(Divide all the students into several groups and show a picture（图片略）to them with the computer.Every group can choose two students to join.They are asked to come to the blackboard and write down the words in 30 seconds.)
(Group 2 is the champion group.They can write 11 words.)
2.Introduce the champion group to the class.（引课方式贴近生活，学生易于接受）
Teacher: Congratulations, now Group 2 is the champion.But I don’t know your names.Would you like to introduce yourselves to us?
S1& S2:Yes.S1:Hello.My name is Li Lei.Nice to meet you.Ss: Hello, Li Lei.Nice to meet you ,too.Ss: Hello!What’s your name?
S2:I’m Sun Ping.How do you do?
Ss: How do you do ?
Step Two: Drills.1.Make introductions.（通过句型的操练使学生更加熟练掌握所学的句式。）
Teacher: The new term begins.Everyone will meet many new classmates.Do you want to make friends with them? If your answer is “yes”, please introduce yourself in your group.Example:
Sa: Hello!I’m Li Lei.What’s your name?
Sb: My name’s Zhang Feng.Nice to meet you.Sa: Nice to meet you, too.And what’s your name, please?
Sc: Lin Li.How do you do?
Sa：How do you do?
2.Listen and number the conversations.Teacher: Today I have good news for you.Three new students will come to our class.They are from other countries.Do you want to know them? Let’s listen to the recording of 1b in Section A.(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
Step Three: Make friends.1.Make new friends.（用谈话的方式完成任务，生动活泼，同时更容易向学生进行美德教育。）
Teacher: Now everyone has some new friends.Do you want others to know them? Do you want more friends? Let’s introduce our new friends to others, OK?
Ss: OK.Example:
Sa: This is my new friend.His name is Sun Nan.Sb: Hello, Sun Nan.Nice to meet you.Sc: Nice to meet you, too.Look!This is my new friend.Her name is He Lu.Ss: How do you do?
Sd: How do you do?
(Students can stand up and introduce their friends to others freely.They can greet each other warmly.Everyone in the class can have more friends.They can also know something else about them.)
2.The New comers.（以表演的形式完成，使课堂气氛达到高潮。）
Teacher: Just now I said three new students from other countries would come to our class.Now, look!They are here.Let’s give them a warm welcome.(Three “foreign”students come in and all the students clap warmly.)
Teacher: It’s their first time to come to China.Would you like to listen to their introductions?
Ss: Yes.(Three students can make introductions and act out the dialogue vividly.)
Step Three: Sum up.Some students are asked to sum up this lesson.It is how to make new friends and how to greet them.It is very important in the daily life.Homework
“How do you meet new visitors at home?
Period Two
课前准备
教师：准备歌曲磁带（歌词）、情景图片及上课所需表格。
学生：需要向父母了解自已名字的含义。
教学设计
Step One: Revise the sentence patterns.1.Sing an English song.（用唱歌的方式既带动了气氛，又复习了所学内容。）
Teacher: Yesterday we’ve known each other already.Do you remember your new friends’names? If you do, let’s sing the song “What’s your name?”.Hello!Hello!What’s your name? My name’s Gina.Hello!Hello!What’s his name? His name’s Peter.Hello!Hello!What’s her name? Her name’s Anna.2.Listen to the conversations and finish the exercises.Teacher: Yesterday I made a new friend.Her name is Jenny.She is very lovely.She introduces many friends of hers to me.Do you want to know about them? Let’s listen to the tape and find out some useful information.(Students listen to the tape and give the right answers.)
3.Act out the dialogues.（在特定的情景下表演对话更符合实际，更贴近生活。）
Teacher: Now you’ve known something about introductions and greetings.But if you are in other places, how do you introduce yourself and greet others? Look at the four pictures and imagine you are in such a situation, how do you get to know new friends?
(Students can choose any picture they like and act out the dialogues.)
Example:
(At a party)
Sa: Hello!I’m Lucy Green.What’s your name?
Sb: My name is Kate Brown, Jim’s classmate.Nice to meet you.Sa: Nice to meet you, too.I’m Jim’s sister.Welcome to Jim’s birthday party.Make yourself at home.Sb: Thanks, I will.Step Two: Choose English names.1.Play a name game.（有效引出“英文名字”这一主题。）
Teacher：As we know, everyone has a name.Each name has its special meaning and so do English names.Do you want to have an English name? If you do, let’s play a name game.The winners of the game will get English names.Rules: Every student should introduce himself or herself,but at the same time he(she)should repeat all the above-mentioned classmates' names.Example:
S1: My name’s Tony.S2: His name’s Tony.My name’s Linda.S3: His name’s Tony.Her name’s Linda.My name’s Nick.S4: His name’s Tony.Her name’s Linda.His name's Nick.My name's Kim.S5:…….2.Choose English names.1).Find out first names and last names.（用小组的方式完成名字的识别。）
Teacher: Congratulations to the winners.Now you choose English names from the box.But before you choose names, you must know English names have two parts: first name and last name.Look at the box, can you classify them according to the demands?
Jenny Gina Alan Mary Jim Tony Tom Bob MikeGreen Miller Jack Smith Brown Linda Nick Kim HandPeriod Three
课前准备
教师：准备所需的歌曲磁带、名片样本及各项表格。
学生：制作名片所需的纸张、画笔等。
教学设计
Step One: Present the English numbers.1.Sing the song “Ten Little Indian Boys”.（歌曲欢快有趣，比起单纯教授单词更为有效。）
Teacher: During the first two classes, we’ve known something about new friends names.But if we want to contact them.What shall we do?
S1: A telephone call.T: But you don’t have their telephone numbers.S1: Ask for their telephone numbers.T: If we want to know about their telephone numbers, we must learn how to say these numbers in English.Let’s learn to sing “Ten Little Indian Boys”.Words
One little, two little, three little Indisns,Four little, five little, six little Indians,Seven little, eight little, nine little Indians,Ten little Indian boys.(After singing the song, tell the students not to forget “zero”.)
T: Count the number together from zero to nine.S2: Zero…
2.Listen to the conversation and write the telephone number.（通过听力复习单词。）
Teacher: This is my friend’s telephone number.But I can’t hear it uld you please help me write it down?
(Students listen to the recording of 1b in Section B and give the answer.)
Step Two: Drills.1.Make a survey about your partners’ telephone numbers.（调查组内成员的电话号码，重点练习所学句式。）
Teacher: Thank you for your help.But do you want to know your friends’ telephone numbers? Now let’s make a survey about it and try to fill in the chart.
NameTelephone numbersLi LeiLiu Yu
Lin Fang
Yin Kailin
S1: Hello, Liu Yu.What’s your telephone number?
S2: My telephone number is …
S1: Oh, thank you.What about yours, Lin Fang?
S3: It’s…
S1: … And may I know your phone number, Yin Kailin?
S4: …
S1: Thank you very much.Oh, I nearly forgot.My telephone number is…
2.Report it to the class.(After the survey, every group can choose a student to report the survey result to the class.)
Example:
My telephone number is… Liu Yu’s phone number is… Lin Fang’s telephone number is… Yin Kailin’ s phone number is…
3.Listen and match the names and telephone numbers.（制作电话号码簿这一任务能够大面积调动学生装的参与意识。）
Teacher: I will play the recording twice.The first time just listen.The second time, write the letter of the person’s telephone number in the space after that person’s name.(Students listen to the tape.)
T: Next, I’ll play the recording again.This time, fill in the missing numbers.(Students listen to the tape again.)
T: Can you find out whose telephone numbers they are ?
S:…
4.Make an address book.Teacher: The new term begins.Our class needs an address book to contact each other.Now we can put all the information together and then we can have our own address book.Pay attention to the address book headings “Names” and “Phone numbers”.Now work in groups of six and ask your group members “What’s his /her name? And What’s his/her phone number?”
Step Three: Make an ID card. some different ID cards to the class and try to enjoy them.（向学生展示不同种类的名片，一方面开阔学生眼界，一方面便于学生找出名片所含内容。）（引导学生有效搜集名片上的信息，提高学生的阅读能力。）
Teacher: Now our class has a very useful address book.We can use it to talk with others on the phone.But for most adults, ID cards are more important because they are easy to take along.What’s more, they are very enjoyable.Sometimes they can show the owners’ special personalities.Look at the ID cards below and try to enjoy them.Teacher: From the cards above, what can you find out ?
S1: It must have a person’s name…
S2: Sometimes it has a motto.T: Yes, It must have a person’s name, postcode, telephone number, home address and e-mail address.So if you have a chance to make an ID card, you must think about all the above.But before you make your card, first let’s learn how to get information from the card.It’s very important.2.Read the ID card and answer the questions.（提供参考信息，但允许学生创新。）
Teacher: Look!Here’s an ID card of my friend’s.Please look at it and find out some useful information about her.1.What’s her telephone number?
2.What’s her family name?
3.What’s her first name?
Homework
1.Students are asked to make ID Cards of their own.Demands: A.Useful information must be included.B.It can be designed as beautifully as possible.C.Students may show their own personalities if possible.2.Find out the information about the famous person.Period Four
课前准备
教师:准备评价表、名人图片和一张个人海报。
学生：准备好完成的名片参加展览。
教学设计
Step One: Make an ID card show. the ID cards to the students.Teacher: Yesterday all of you made some beautiful ID we’ll make a show here.Let’s enjoy it together and try to choose the best ones.2.Find the owner of the card.Teacher: The ID card show is over.All the cards are mixed together.I can’t find the owners.Who can help me?
S1:I can.(Show one of the cards to another students.)
S1:Excuse me, are you in...?
S2:Yes, I am.S1:What’s your telephone number?
S2:It’s...S1:Are you...?
S2:Yes, I am.S1:Here’s your ID card.S2:Thank you.(Teacher asks more students to find the owners of ID cards).Step Two: “Face to Face”.1.Play a guessing game.Teacher: ID cards are useful.But some persons’names are known to all the people.They are very famous.Now look at the pictures and guess their names.(The teacher shows some famous person’s pictures and students guess their names and give their answers.)
llect useful information.Teacher: These persons are very famous.But it’s better for us to know something else about them.Before class you’ve been asked to collect some information.Now let’s exchange it together.3.Report it to class.Each group can choose a student to give a report about their favourite person.The other students can ask him some questions in class.Example:
S1:This is Michael Jordan.He’s years old.He’s...He speaks...His birth place is...He is a famous...player.He’s a member of six Chicago Bulls championship teams.People like to call him “Air Jordan”.S2:Do you like Michael Jordan? Why or Why not?
S1:Yes, I like him very much because he’s so...S2:Do you want to be a basketball player like him?
S1:Of course I do.That’s my dream.Step Three: Make a poster about yourself.Teacher: Do you want to be famous all over the world?
First you must learn to show yourself.Now you have a chance to do that.Please try to make a poster about yourself.In your poster you should try to introduce yourself.(Students can write a passage about themselves.They can give some personal information.They can alse design the poster as well as they can.)
Homework
Students are asked to sun up this unit, especially about how to talk with others politely.
七年级英语上册课件 篇2
一 学生情况分析(学生62人，其中男生：36人，女生：26 人)
1.学习水平不均
有的学生对小学英语比较重视，学得很好;但有的学生或学校不重视，学得很不好，还有几个甚至完全没有学过。有的学生笔试不错，但语音、语调、书写都有待加强。因此，整个班级的英语水平很不平衡，给日常教学带来诸多的不便，提高了难度。
2.学习习惯不好
学生刚刚从小学进入初中，处于一个衔接的阶段，学习任务加重，学习的习惯不是很好，没有形成一定的适合自己的方法，都有待改善。
总之，既要避免好生吃不饱的.现象，又要努力把目前英语有欠缺的学生拉上去，激发他们的兴趣和信心，赶上中上的水平学生。在今后的教学中应该注重培养、激发兴趣，教给学生学习的方法，从学生的学习兴趣、学习能力、生活经验和认知水平出发，倡导体验、实践、参与与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径，发展学生的综合语言运用能力，使语言的学习过程成为学生形成积极的情感态度、主动思维和大胆实践、提高跨文化意识和形成学生自主学习能力的过程，这是新课标和新目标英语的要求。
教学措施和辅助
二 课时总安排
总共100课时：授课 课时 复习 课时
测试 课时 机动 课时
三.教材总体目标、单元要求及重难点
The goal:
The goal of Go for it is to make language a step-by-step progression that builds confidence and leads to open-ended activities where students can actively relate learning to their personal lives.
Go For It! 是以《英语课程标准》为依据，以学生的英语语言综合运用能力为目标。不仅以语言知识、语言技能为重点，而且更注重学生的学习策略、情感态度和文化意识。教学内容的处理和取舍灵活开放， 只要教师从学生的实际水平和语言能力出发，任何教学内容的调整或取舍，任何教学步骤的安排都是可行的。“I sometimes go to the last to do the group work first…It depends on the teachers’ knowledge of the students actual language ability…”(David Nunan);提倡教师结合学生实际，充分利用学生、教师本身和环境中一切可以利用的资源，丰富教学内容，创造运用英语的机会，注意多渠道开发教学资源。 “Don’t use just the textbook. Anything in real life that connect and appropriate to the lesson can be used as teaching resources.”(David Nunan);提倡任务型语言教学，教学进度整体把握，教学形式不拘一格;课堂以学生为主体，以任务为主线，重视体验参与，课后访谈调查，读写扎记，重视语言运用;正视个体差异，倡导过程激励，以多层次、多角度、多主体的结果与过程并重的评价方式激励进步。
The key points of each unit:
Topic Functions Structures
U 1 Making new friends Introduce yourself
Greet people
Ask for and give telephone numbers Present tense to be
What questions
Prossessive adjectives:my,your,his,her
U2 Things in the classroom
Identify ownerships Demonstratives:this,that
What questions and Yes/No questions
How do you spell pen?
U3 The family Introduce people
Identify people Demonstratives:these,those
Subject pronouns:I,he,she
Yes/No questions
Plural nouns
U4 Things around the house Talk about where things are Where questions and Yes/No questions
Prepositions: on,in,under
Subject pronouns: they
U5 Spending time with friends Ask and answer questions about ownership
Make suggestions Present tense to have
Yes/No questions and short answers: let’s
Adjectives of quality
U6
Food Talk about likes and dislikes Present tense to like
Yes/No questions and short answers
Affirmative and negative statements
U7
Shopping Ask about prices
Talk about clothing
Thank someone Demonstratives:this,that,these,those
How much questions
U8
Dates Talk about dates When questions
Prossessive “s”
How old are you?
U9
Movies Talk about preferences
Make plans Present tense to want
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Adjectives of quality
U10 Joining a club Talk about abilities Modal verb can
Yes/No questions and short answers:
Affirmative and negative statements
What questions
U11 Daily routines Talk about daily routines
Ask about and say times When questions
What time is it?
Adverbs of frequency
U 12 School subjects Talk about preferences
Give reasons What questions
Why questions
Who questions
Adjectives of quality
四、 教材分析
新目标任务型教学的特色理念：《新目标英语》是以任务为基础的语言教学，在教材的设计上，遵循了自然言语、情境真实性、语言形式为交流功能性服务、层层深入阶梯型发展语言能力、在做中学等最新教学原则和理念，注重引导学生体会文化差异，培养学生自主学习能力，完全符合教育部的《义务教育阶段英语课程标准》的要求。本教材的教学理念：“知识用于行动”，强调“语言应用”，培养“创新、实践能力”，发展“学习策略”。
人教社《新目标英语》教材的几大特色：
A. 图文并茂。一幅副充满情趣，幽默生动的画面，令你眼睛一亮。它不仅版面设计充满新意，而且在内容和结构方面更富有创意 更具时代感，更有现代气息，更加贴近学生的生活。学生一拿到课本后都爱不释手，迫不及待地翻阅。
B. 实用性强。每个单元的选材都来源于学生的学习和生活。紧紧地与学生的年龄特征、认知结构、生活经验联系在一起。如第一册的十四个话题：认识新朋友、教室里的物品、家庭成员、食品、购物、电影、参加社团、生活习惯、学习科目、国家与语言。第二册的十二个话题：邻居、动物、足球、职业、周末活动、音乐、人物性格与外貌、天气、节日、度假与休闲、流行文化、规章制度与日常生活。由于这些都是学生熟悉的话题，生活中经常碰到的事情，所以学生容易接受，学习热情自然也高。使教学活动由“要我学”转变为“我要学”。
C.注重交际。针对中国学生学英语普遍存在的“聋哑病”，教材设计了大量的听说读写材料。每个单元都有语言活动，且内容不同，形式多样，学生对这些活动充满兴趣，所以大家都能情绪高昂地参加pair work, group work, games等活动。学生们充满了自信，开心地练习说英语，教室里常常充满了欢歌笑语。同学们都喜欢上英语课，他们能为学以致用而感到兴奋，同时也体验到了学习语言的快乐。
D.词汇量大。第一册有词汇700个左右，第二册约450个，第三册约450个，第四册约400个， 第五册约500个，合计2500个。这一点正好达到《英语课程标准》5级的要求。大大丰富了学生的词汇量，让学生能更好地表达自己的所思所想。同时也要求学生必须采取有效的记忆单词的方法，就会事半功倍，否则难以适应教材的要求。这时学生特别需要教师的指导 .。
《新目标英语》的教材设计原则
a.言语、情境真实性原则 (The authenticity principle)
任务的设计要提供给学习者明确、真实的语言信息。语言情境、语言形式等要符合交际的功能和规律。使学习者在一种自然、真实或模拟真实的情境中体会语言、掌握语言的应用。
b.形式-功能性原则 (The form-function principle)
任务的设计注重语言形式和语言功能的结合。形式-功能性原则，旨在使学习者掌握语言形式的同时，培养其自我把握语言功能的能力;每一阶段任务的设计都具有一定的导入性，学生在学习语言形式的基础上，通过系列任务的训练，能够自己进行推理和演绎，从而理解语言的功能，并在交际中进行真实运用。
c.阶梯型任务原则 (The task dependency principle)
学习单元中任务的设计由简到繁，由易到难，层层深入，并形成由初级任务到高级任务并由高级任务涵盖初级任务的循环。在语言技能方面，遵循先听、读，后说、写的设计顺序，使教学阶梯式地层层递进。
d. 在做中学原则 (Learning by doing)
自始至终引导学生通过完成具体的任务活动来学习语言，让学生为了特定的学习目的去实施特定的语言行动，通过完成特定的交际任务来获得和积累相应的学习经验。
五、教学具体措施及辅助活动
1.利用直观教具和教学辅助媒体，激发兴趣，增加容量，整体优化课堂教学。
2.每日进行单词竞赛。
3.学唱英文歌。
4.坚持值日生报告。
5.开展多种游戏和竞赛活动。
六、教学进度表
Week 1 Starter Unit 1 5课时
Week 2 Starter Unit 2& Starter Unit 3 5课时
Week 3 Unit 1 6课时
Week 4 Unit 2 6课时
Week 5 Unit 3 6课时
Week 6 Revision 6课时
Week 7 Unit4 6课时
Week8 Unit 5 6课时
Week 9 Unit 6 6课时
Week 10 Revision 6课时
Week 11 Middle examination 6课时
Week 12 Unit 7 6课时
Week 13 Unit 8 6课时
Week 14 Unit 9 6课时
Week 15 Unit 10 6课时
Week 16 Unit 11 6课时
Week 17 Unit 12 6课时
Week 18 Revision 6课时
Week 19 Revision 6课时
Week 20 Final examination
七年级英语上册课件 篇3
一.单元分析
本单元以家庭为话题，以家庭介绍为任务学习That’s my sister. These are my brothers. Who is she?等句型的使用。要求学生能够做到：
1.运用这些句型向别人介绍某人的能力和与人交际的能力;
2.能向别人介绍自己的家庭情况;
3.在珍视自己的家庭，珍爱亲情的同时，关心不幸家庭的同学，对他们做力所能及的帮助。
二.学情分析
学生在小学中已经学习过一些家庭成员称呼的知识，对于一些简单的称谓表达没有问题，但书写仍然是有问题的。同时，由于中西方文化的差异，中国家庭中的一些关系可能不好表达，老师需要做必要的补充。
另外，由于计划生育政策的施行，同学们的兄弟姐妹少了，这对于brother, sister的概念的表达可能有些不利。但是，中国是一个注重家庭的国家，本单元的学习会让学生了解不同国家的家庭结构间的不同。同时由于班级内可能有来自单亲家庭的同学，在授课时要注意保护学生，不要伤及学生的自尊，同时要注意培养学生的移情能力。
三.课时安排
四课时
四.教学过程
Period 1 (A1, 3a, B3)
I. Teaching Objectives
1. Knowledge Objectives:
(1) Expressions: sister, mother, father, parent, brother, grandmother, grandfather, grandparent, family, those, who, oh, these, those, they.
(uncle, aunt, cousin, niece, nephew, here, photo )
(2) Structure: That’s my family. Those are my parents. Who’s she? She’s my sister. Oh, and these are my brothers.
3) Grammar: The plural forms of the demonstrative pronouns.
2. Ability Objectives:
(1) Learn how to introduce the family.
(2) Get Ss to know the names of the various members of a family.
3. Moral Objectives: Father and mother, I love you!
II. Teaching Importance(focus)
(1) Learn how to introduce the family.
(2) Get Ss to know the names of the various members of a family.
(3) Get Ss to know the differences between this/that is and these/those are.
(4) Get Ss to know who questions
III. Teaching Difficulties
1. 因为单复数的问题，学生对this与these，that与those的转换可能会弄错，
2. 在拼写时，学生习惯把mother写成monther。
3. grandmother，grandfather中d不发音。
Ⅳ. Teaching Aids
A recorder, multi-media
Ⅴ. Teaching Procedure:
Step l：Lead in
Enjoy an English song called the Finger Family, do daily greetings as usual.
Step 2: Pre-task
1. T: Today I’ll introduce a new friend.
Then show a picture of a boy to teacher new words about family members.
2. Work on 1a, match the words.
3. Listening practice: Do A 1b, first listen and circle the words, then imitate.
4. Look at the picture on SB P7, ask and answer in pairs.
Step 3：While-task
Photo show. 1.T ask and S answer
2. Ss ask and answer in pairs. Then Do A3a
3. Make a short passage about the photo. Then Do B 2b.
step 4：Post-task
Draw a photo of family and write about it, then share with friends.
Step 4. Sum up
Do exercises in class and check the answers
Homework
1.完成2号本P14-15 第一课时
2. 预习Unit 2 第二课时
3. 完成 Self check 2
4. 常规听读，听写作业
Layout of Bb
Unit 2 This is my sister. Period 1
sister, mother, father, parent, brother, grandmother, grandfather, grandparent, family, those, who, oh, these, those, they.
That’s my family.
Those are my parents.
Who’s she?
She’s my sister.
Oh, and these are my brothers.
教学反思：
Period 2 (A2)
I. Teaching Objectives
1. Knowledge Objectives:
(1) Expressions: well, have, day, bye, goodbye
(2) Structure: Have a good! Thanks! You, too. Bye!
— Nice to meet you. — Nice to meet you, too
(3) Grammar: Yes or No questions.
2. Ability Objectives:
(1) Identifying people and the relationship.
(2) Find out the correct relationship.
七年级英语上册课件 篇4
一、教学设计思路
用真实衣物做道具模拟情境，帮助学生练习谈论物品的颜色和价格;配以图片、视频歌曲等多媒体手段，加深学生印象。
二、教学目标
(一)知识
1.掌握如何谈论物品的颜色和价格：Howmuchis/are…?It's/They're…dollars.black,white,red,green,blue,yellow
2.掌握衣物的名称：socks,T-shirts,pants,shorts,sweater,hat
3.掌握数字10-31
4.掌握购物礼貌用语：CanIhelpyou?I'lltake…Thankyou.You'rewelcome.
(二)能力
能够在生活中买必要的东西。
(三)情感
在生活中要应用礼貌用语。
三、教学重点
谈论价钱
四、教学难点
结合物品的颜色、数量等询问和回答价钱。
五、教学媒体
常见衣物;电脑;投影仪
六、教学过程
(一)巧妙导入
方法1:通过询问学生衣服的颜色复习颜色词汇，进而引出衣物的话题。
方法2:拿出不同种类的衣物引起学生注意，进入话题
以上就是出国留学网小编给各位朋友带来的七年级上册英语教案范文是怎样的?希望本文分享的英语教案范文能对各位朋友有所帮助!
七年级英语上册课件 篇5
教学内容：Unit 6 Do you like bananas?
教材解读
本单元主要讨论各种食物以及喜欢或不喜欢某种食物；询问某人是否喜欢某种食物及回答；会描述一日三餐，会合理搭配一日三餐。
like的一般现在时、一般疑问句及肯、否定回答；肯定句和否定句。
通过本单元的学习，认识到在平日饮食中要做到不挑食、不偏食、合理饮食。
教学目标
一、知识与技能
1.掌握基本词汇：food、banana、hamburger、tomato、broccoli、French fries、strawberry、orange、ice cream、salad。
2.掌握句型：Do you like bananas? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.二、过程与方法
通过听说读写等任务型活动，熟练应用所学单词和动词词组。
三、情感态度和价值观
认识并了解各种食物，能分清水果和蔬菜并能认识到水果和蔬菜对人体有益。通过询问对方是否喜欢某食物来引起话题。
教学重点
基本单词、词汇和句型。
教学难点
1.认识并掌握重点词汇。
2.能流利地与对方开展关于食物喜好的对话。教法导航
采用任务型教学途径并配以多媒体辅助教学，同时考虑学生的不同层次采取分层递进的教学方法。
学法导航
让学生在游戏的情景中感受到轻松愉悦、民主和谐的环境气氛，学生积极主动参与，从而产生了强烈的求知愿望，增强学习兴趣。
教学准备
PPT、关于食物的图片。教学过程
Step 1: Greetings.Greet the students as usual.Step 2: Revision Show the students pictures and ask:What’s this? It’s a soccer ball.Do you have a soccer ball? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.Do you like it? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.Step 3: New words Show the students some food and ask:
2What’s this? It’s a hamburger.Do you like it? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.What are these? They’re bananas.Do you like bananas? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.运用图片和对话教学单词：hamburger、banana、tomato、broccoli、French fries、strawberry、orange、ice cream、salad，并运用这些单词进行对话。
Step 4: Pair work Work in pairs and try to match the words with the pictures of 1a.Step 5: Listening 1b Listen and number the conversations.After listening, show the dialogue on the screen and get the students to practice the conversations, and then make their own conversations.Step 6: Listening Listen and circle the food you hear.First get the students to check their answers in groups and then report their answers.Step 7: Listen again Listen again and fill in the blanks.I like hamburgers.Do you like hamburgers? Yes, I do.Do you like______? No, I don’t like ______.Let’s have _______.Oh, no.I don’t like_________.Step 8: Group work Make a food survey in groups by asking: Do you like...? Then fill in the blanks to complete the form.How many students like hamburgers? How many students like bananas? Step 9: Summary Let’s sum what we have learned this class.Words:banana, hamburger, tomato, ice cream, salad, strawberry.Sentences:Do you like hamburgers? Yes, I do./No, I don’t.Step 10: Homework 1.Remember the words in this class.2.Practise the dialogue in pairs.课堂作业
1.写出下列名词
(1)汉堡 ____________(2)西红柿 _____________(3)沙拉 ____________(4)草莓 ____________(5)梨 ____________(6)牛奶 __________(7)面包 __________(8)冰激凌 _________2.根据句意完成句子
(1)A:_______ you like salad? B:No, I _______./Yes, I ______.(2)I __________(喜欢)hamburgers.(3)_____________(你喜欢)hamburgers?(4)____________(我们吃)strawberries.参考答案：
1.(1)hamburger(2)tomato(3)salad(4)strawberry(5)pear(6)milk(7)bread(8)ice cream
2.(1)Do, don’t, do(2)like(3)Do you like(4)Let’s教学反思
这节课以学生的日常生活为话题，用丰富多彩的实物和图片激发学生的学习兴趣，学生踊跃参加课堂活动，效果很好。
七年级英语上册课件 篇6
人教版七年级上册英语课件
Unit12 My favorite subject is science课件.rarUnit12 My favorite subject is science课件3.rarUnit12 My favorite subject is science课件2.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件3.rarUnit11 What time do you go to school课件2.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件3.rarUnit10 Can you play the guitar课件2.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件3.rarUnit9 Do you want to go to a movie课件2.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件3.rarUnit8 When is your birthday PPT课件2.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件3.rarUnit7 How much are these pants课件2.rarUnit6 Do you like bananas PPT课件.rarUnit6 Do you like bananas PPT课件2.rar
Unit5 Do you have a soccer ball课件.rarUnit5 Do you have a soccer ball课件2.rarUnit4 Where's my backpack PPT课件.rarUnit4 Where's my backpack PPT课件2.rarUnit3 This is my sister PPT课件.rarUnit3 This is my sister PPT课件2.rarUnit2 Is this your pencil PPT课件.rarUnit2 Is this your pencil PPT课件2.rarUnit1 My name's Gina PPT课件.rar
七年级英语上册课件 篇7
一、教学目标
1、知识目标
（1）学习并掌握描述天气的词汇：rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
（2）掌握句型结构：
—How is the weather(in +地点)?/What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.2、能力目标
学会使用本单元的单词和句型询问天气并作出恰当的应答。
3、情感目标
（1）通过小组合作完成任务，培养学生团结合作的意识。
（2）通过谈论天气，了解一些地理常识。
（3）通过学习天气，培养学生的乐观积极向上的心态。
二、教学重难点
1、教学重点
（1）描述天气的词汇：rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
（2）掌握句型结构：
—How is the weather(in +地点)? /What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.2、教学难点
（1）名词转换形容词的构词法：sun—sunny、rain—rainy、wind—windy、cloud—cloudy、snow—snowy
（2）国外城市的读音和拼音
三、教学方法
教师采用任务型教学方法让学生主动参与小组合作探究，迅速有效地开展各项活动。
四、教学辅助工具：黑板、多媒体设备
五、教学过程：
1、热身运动
（1）师生共唱“rain? go? away”, 活跃课堂气氛。
（2）做个模拟下雨的游戏，引出本课有关天气的话题。
2、导入生词：
（1）以weather为中心词，让学生进行头脑风暴，回忆有关天气的词汇，然后观看PPT图片导入本课新单词：rainy、windy、sunny、cloudy、snowy
（2）教师带读，让学生熟记单词。
3、呈现句型
（1）给出句型结构：
—How is the weather(in +地点)? /What’s the weather like?(in +地点)?
—It’s rainy/windy/sunny/cloudy/snowy.（2）分别用两个句型进行游戏比赛，让学生在游戏中反复巩固新句型和新知识点。
4、听力练习，课本37页，1b5、PPT呈现中国气象地图，让学生小组讨论并抽代表上讲台模拟天气预报，并作出评价。
6、课堂总结：总结本节课所学单词和句型
7、课堂练习
8、情感升华
六、教学反思
1、课堂板书设计得应该更能适合本节课的总结这一环节，以后注意板书的书写
2、课堂口语需加强，有些突发状况还不能立即用英语表达。
七年级英语上册课件 篇8
各位老师：
大家好！今天我要说课的内容是新目标七年级英语上册第二单元Section A的前部分，题目是Is this your pencil ?其主要的内容是学会辨认物品的所有者这一话题。由于本单元具有两部分Section A和Section B。从本单元来说，本节课既是本单元的基本语言内容，又为本单元知识扩展和综合语言运用奠定坚实的基础。因此，上好Section A的前部分，既可让知识学习具有一定的延续性，又可为下面的教学做好铺垫，对完成本单元和今后的英语教学具有重要的意义。
重点、难点及处理对于Secttion A前部分的教学，我准备把对词汇的掌握和听力的理解作为重点，把结队活动的核心对话作为难点。这是因为我校地处农村，学生在英语学习方面没有一个好的语言氛围，也没有听力训练的条件，因此解决这一重点，能让学生进一步感受英语语言的美，体验知识间的相互应用、相互依存的联系，让学生充满自信，体验成就感和合作精神。
教学方法为达到以上的教育教学目标，根据英语“课标”中强调课程要从学生的学习兴趣、生活经验和认知水平出发，倡导体验、实践、参入、合作与交流的学习方式和任务型的教学途径，发展学生的综合语言运用能力，是语言学习的过程成为学生主动参与、勤于动脑，提高跨文化意识的过程。根据学校和学生的实际，我将在教学中利用实物，采用任务型教学模式，运用情景教学法，结合听说法、竞赛法，以循序渐进的方式来进行教学。
首先，采用听说法和实物来导入和呈现本届的基本词汇和句型，目的在于用师生、生生互动的方式，激活学生对所学知识的已有体验，使学生对重点词语的识记经过一个由形象思维到抽象思维的转化过程，增强学生的记忆效果。其次，采用任务型教学途径，在活动中以循序渐进法，连锁操练，运用实物提示，展开竞赛等方式来突破重点，培养学生综合语言运用能力。这样不仅激活了学生的主体意识，而且在活学活用知识的过程中，增强了学生学习的自信心，从而体验到成功的喜悦。
学法教法的选择固然重要，但学法也必不可少。我们都知道，学生的学习过程并不是孤立于课堂教学之中，应遵循学生的身心发展规律和学习规律，指导学生进行个性化的学习，让学生在活动与交流中产生个性化的体验。《课标》明确指出：“英语课程应面向全体学生，力求为每个学生的充分发展创造条件。教师在教学的过程中要倡导学生体验、实践、参与、合作与交流的学习方式，结合课改精神和我校的学情，在本节教学中我主要采用小组自由合作学习的方式，由不同层次的学生组合成4人一小组。因为这样的合作学习方式能突出以人为本的教育思想，符合教育的宗旨，使学生个人之间的竞争转化为小组之间的竞争，既有助于培养学生的合作精神，团队意识以及集体观念，又有助于培养学生的竞争意识与能力，在活动中体验合作成功的快乐，体验实现自我价值的幸福。
七年级英语上册课件 篇9
新版七年级英语上册课件【1】
我说课的内容是北师大版数学七年级上册第三章的第一节课《字母能表示什么》，我主要从“教材分析”、“教法与学法分析”、“教学过程设计与说明”、“设计追求的特色”四个方面组织说课。
一、教材分析
（一）教材所处的地位
本节课北师大出版的新课程标准实验教材第三章的第一节课，在以前的学习中学生比较熟悉对具体数的操作，这是学生初次接触用较为抽象的字母来表示数，对字母表示数含义的理解有助于代数式以及方程的列出，是学习后续知识的关键。
（二）教学目标
1.知识目标：在现实情景中感受用字母表示数的意义，明确字母可以表示任何数，会用字母表示探索的规律，能用字母表示运算律和公式。
2.能力目标：经历探索数量关系，发现规律，运用字母表示规律，并通过运算验证规律的过程。
3.情感目标：一是体会字母表示数的意义，形成初步的符号感；二是进一步感受数学魅力，在学习过程中激发学生学习数学、探索数学奥妙的内在动力和外在的积极性，并在过程中培养学生的创新意识和实践能力。
（三）教学的重点、难点
1．立足本人的分析确定的：字母表示数的意义、数学规律的探索及符号表达，这些内容也是本课的难点。
2．可能基于学生个性差异、基础差异在学习过程中感觉困难的地方也是本课的难点。在教学过程中，我将认真注意，并尽力帮学生突破。
二、教法和学法分析
我校是定点的移民子女、进城务工子女就读学校，留守生在班级中占38%，学生的个性、基础能力差异很大，加上七年级学生处于小学与初中的衔接过渡初期，所以本节课我选择引导探索与分层教学相结合的方法。在新知的引出过程中，注意由浅入深，由特殊到一般地提出问题。引导学生自主探索，尤其在形成新知生长点的时候，充分发挥分层教学法的优点，帮学有余力的发挥潜能，挖掘
潜能，在先行的基础上发挥他们“先学后教”（后教就是帮助老师教，当老师的助手，在过程中达到教学相长的功效），教师抽出精力帮助学习困难的学生，帮助有“怪问题”的学生。注重时间分配，尽量做到先学在当堂，同层竞赛在当堂，异层帮辅在当堂，练习探讨在当堂、激发兴趣在当堂。
在教学过程中，关注每一学生，让每一个学生都动起来，促成学生成为学习的主人，从而发挥学生的主体作用。
三、教学过程设计及说明
（一）情景导入：利用电子白板的幕布创设问题情境（插入背景音乐，增加形象性和趣味性）：“一只青蛙1张嘴，2只眼睛4条腿，1声扑通跳下水。两只青蛙2张嘴，4只眼睛8条腿，2声扑通跳下水。三只青蛙3张嘴，6只眼睛12条腿，3声扑通跳下水。6767”，让学生把这首儿歌继续唱下去，唱几句即可，然后老师提问：在这首儿歌中假如有a只青蛙，那么请同学们思考一下，应该有多少张嘴，多少眼睛多少腿，以及多少声普通跳下水？问题设计具有一定的趣味性，引出可以用字母表示数。目的是激发学生的学习欲望，体现数学来源于实际生活，数学是从人的需要中产生这一认识的基本观点。
在这个过程中，尽量发挥不同层次学生的作用，体现出学生的自主学习、自我探讨、总结交流等主体性的过程。
（二）实验操作：用电子白板拉出问题。鼓励学生用火柴棒或木棒，按照“口”、“日”、“目”搭建正方形，然后填表，找规律。按照同层独立先竞争、异层小组后合作、全班交流分享的办法进行。
填写下表：
1在处理问题的过程中，充分抓住新知的生长点做文章，前四个空是铺垫，后一个空是新知生长点。对学有余力的学生，要求把100变成10000填空。这样做既培养了独立思考、勇于探索的能力，又培养了学生的帮扶意识和合作品质，还激发了学生的进取精神。
（三）问题解决和方法交流：按照小组交流和班级分享的办法进行。展示出想到的各种方法，小组推荐代表发言，鼓励学生对发言进行诊断评价，及时提醒学生注意发言、评价有无不妥，充分发挥教师平等中的首席作用。在这个过程中，还注意数学学习氛围的打造，保持教师刻意打造学习氛围的意识。
（四）随堂练习。分层次推出练习。设置三组，一是必做题2个；二是挑战题2个；三是攻坚题4个。设计时注重了层次，必做体现了保底；挑战和攻坚有层次的观注了个性差异。在同层之间进行竞赛性的统计，控制了学生思考的松紧度。
随堂练习的评价由先行的学生负责，教师给予适当的提醒。基本按照学生先做----代表评价-----教师适当帮助的步骤进行。
（五）课堂小结：主要通过学生回忆本节课所学内容，从内容、应用、数学思想方法、获取新知的途径方面先进行小结。教师尽量不补尾巴。以免形成学生总结时注意力不集中，教师总结才听的局面，在学生总结不全面可以给足时间让学生补充，真正当好平等中的首席。
（六）布置作业：内容略。
控制时间，尽量让学生当堂完成，不加重课后负担，不降低学习的积极性。
四、设计追求的特色
在本节课的设计过程中，我注重把握了以下几点：
1．既研究了教法，也研究了学法，基本按照以学定教的思路进行设计。
２.重视了新知生长点，在新知生长点创造学生思考的问题，给足思考的空间。
３．注重了先学后教，而且尽可能让学有余力的学生去教，实现将带兵，兵促兵，兵教兵的局面。
４．发挥先进的教学手段如电子白板在教学中的辅助作用。
５．发挥学生的主体地位，摆正教师平等中的首席地位。
６．尽量做到课外不留作业，作业、练习分层安排，真正关注学生的个体差异。
７．注重创设学习氛围，激发兴趣，培养兴趣，巩固兴趣。
新版七年级英语上册课件【2】
Unit 1 Topic 3 How old are you ?
Section D
学习目标
1.学习以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码等个人信息
2.能读懂短文并能从简单的名片中获得信息
3.能向大家做自我介绍
学习重点
以短文形式谈论姓名、年龄、学校、班级和电话号码
学习难点
第一人称和第三人称的转变
学习过程
(一)导入
(二)自学指导
1、预习课本P23 Part 1 ,复习书上的六个音标
2、预习课本P23 Part 2 ,分别找出Jane 和 Huang Hua 的个人信息
3、预习P23 Part 3 ,根据所给信息把空补充完整
4、背诵课本P24 Part 4a 4b
(三)问题导学 再看课本P22 Part 2 ,回答问题。
Where is Jane from ?__________________________
How old is she ?___________________________
What class is she in ? _____________________
Where is Huang Hua from ? _______________
What’s his English name ? _____________________
Are they in the same class ? ______________
(四)典题训练
(五)精讲点拨
1、They are not in the same class ,but they good friends.他们不在同一个班，但是他们是好朋友。
解析：same 意思是“相同的”，前面一定要用定冠词“the”，后面接单数名词。
but 意为“但是，可是”，起转折作用。
eg : We are in the same school ,but in different classes.我们在同一个学校，但是在不同的班级。
五.当堂检测
(一)用be动词的适当形式填空
1、---How old ________ you ?
2、----I ________ ten.3、---What _____ this ?-
4、---It _________ a pen.5、----Who ________ that ?
----She _________ Lucy.6、---What _________ these ?
----They ________ schoolbags.7、---__________ this a pen ?
----Yes , it _________.(二)单项选择
1.What’s that _______ Chinese ?
A、on B、in C、with
2.Is he ____________ English boy ?
A、a B、an C、the3、These are my _____________.A、book B、pens C、a friend4、---Is this your eraser ?----Yes ,____________.A、it is B、this is C、it’s5、They are not ________ the same class ,but they
are good friends.A、in B、on C、from
七、作业布置
(一)根据句意和首字母提示填空
1.They are in the s________ class.2、--How o________ is she ?---She is 15.3.Li Ming and Wang Fei are good f___________.4、I’m in a h_________ school.5、Is your p__________ number 3264-7853 ?
(二)选择填空
1、______ is Zhou Lan._________ phone number is 1358429764.A、Her , her B、She , her C、She , She2、What grade ______ your brother in ?
A、is B、am C、are3、---Is that a car ?---No ,____________
A、that isn’t B、that is C、it isn’t4、Nine and eleven is __________.A、thirteen B、fifteen C、twenty5、_________ are good friends.A、you ,he and I B、I ,you and he C、you and he ,I This is an English boy(男孩).His name is Jim.He is twelve.He is in my school.He and I are in the same grade.I’m in Class Three, Grade Seven, but he is in Class Four.I’m his good friend.He is my good friend, too.根据短文内容, 补全对话。
A: Excuse me, what’s his name?
B: His name is Jim.A: 6.______________________________
B: Yes.J-I-M, Jim.A: Where is he from?
B: 7.______________________________
A: How old is he?
B: 8.______________________________
A: Is he in your school?
B: 9.______________________________
A: Is he in Class Three, Grade Seven?
B: 10.______________________________
He is in Class Four, but he and I are good friends.A: Thank you.汉译英：1.布朗是他的姓氏。Brown is his ____ ____.12.那是一张地图吗
Is that ____ ____.13.它们是五辆公共汽车。
They are ____ ____.14.让我帮帮你吧。
Let ____ ____ you.15.给你。____ ____ are.(五)作业：请写一份自我介绍，内容包括姓名、年龄、国籍、班级、学校、电话号码。
七年级英语知识点
现在进行时态
概念：表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作，也可以表示目前一段时间内或现阶段正在进行的活动。
结构：由be动词(am, is, are)+ 动词ing构成，其中be动词要与主语保持性数一致。
Mary is flying a kite in the park.玛丽正在公园里放风筝。
--What are you doing now? 你现在在干什么?
--I’m reading English.我正在读英语。
Are they drawing the pictures now? 他们正在画画吗?
动词现在分词是动词原形变化而来的，规则变化如下：
动词ing形式叫动词现在分词，其构成如下：
1)直接在动词后加ing
play—playing, do—doing, talk—talking, sing--singing
2)以不发音的字母e结尾的动词，先去e，再加ing
make—making, write—writing, have—having, take—taking
3)以重读闭音节结尾的动词且词尾只有一个辅音字母，应双写这个辅音字母，再加ing
run—running, stop—stopping, put—putting, swim—swimming
注意对现在进行时态的判断。判断一个英语句子用什么时态，主要看句子的时间状语，一般说来，每种时态都有与之相对应的时间状语。现在进行时表示现在(说话瞬间)正在进行或发生的动作。因此，这个时态最常用的时间状语是now;但有不少句子并没有now，只能通过提示语如look、listen等或者通过上下文来确定用现在进行时。
She is cleaning her room now.她正在打扫房间。
Look!The girl is dancing over there.看!那个女孩在那里跳舞。
--Can you go and play games with me? 你能和我们一起做游戏吗?
--Can’t you see I am doing my homework? 你没看见我正在做作业吗?
七年级下册英语课件(实用11篇)
七年级下册英语课件【篇1】
教学目标
1) 掌握以下单词: rain, windy, cloudy, sunny, snow, weather.
Moscow. Toronto. Boston.
掌握以下句型：—How's the weather in Beijing?
—It's sunny.
2) 能用所学的知识描述不同城市的天气情况。
教学重难点
1. Key points：
1) The vocabulary and useful expressions.
2) —How’s the weather?
—It's raining/ windy.
2. Difficult points：
运用目标语言来对不同城市的天气进行描述问答。
教学过程
...
课后小结
1.本节课我采用任务型教学方法，引导学生自学，并在自学中善于质疑，探究，以及小组合作等形式完成任务。这一过程的实施使学生在学的过程中体现了强烈的求知欲，并积极踊跃举手发言。 另外利用课件创设贴近学生生活的真实情景，让学生比较直观的掌握知识。如在学习描述天气的句型时，首先利用多媒体课件吸引学生的眼球，让他们通过这些图片机械模仿，以便能形成初步的语言感知，然后利用一副天气预报地图，并让学生做主持人来预报天气，这一过程最大限度地调动了学生的求知兴趣。
2. 本节课的也有值得改进的地方：首先，时间分配还不够合理，有些环节用时较多，以致其他环节用时较少。其次，本单元主要谈论天气，可以结合地理方位，国家名称来扩大学生的知识范围，更加开阔学生的视野。在活动方面，学生的主动性还没有完全发挥。最后，在学生探索问题时，对学生进行引导的技巧，在教学机智方面还有待于进一步学习和积累。
课后习题
Filling the blanks with the correct words.
1. ---How is the weather in Zhumadian?
---It________(rain)now.
2. Do you like ________(wind)days?
3. Today is _______(sun).Let's go shopping.
4.______it________(snow)in Moscow now?
5. What _____the people_____(do)in the picture?
6._____it often____(rain) here in summer?
7. Look! There are lots of ______(cloud)in the sky.
板书
Section A (1a-1c)
1. —What's Uncle Joe doing?
—He is playing basketball.
2. —How's the weather in Beijing?
—It's sunny.
频道小编推荐： |
七年级下册英语课件【篇2】
教学目标
1、语言目标
◆ 掌握部分有关电视节目以及表示装饰的词汇，如：soap opera, sitcom, sports show, host, super, agree, hair clip, key ring, belt, wallet etc. ◆ What do you think of,,? 句式在不同人称中的使用及其几种不同的答语方式，并能简单陈述理由。 ◆ 掌握运用love, like, don’t like, don’t mind, can’t stand恰当表达对有关事物的观点和态度。
2、能力目标
◆ 学会陈述自己的看法和意见。 ◆ 学会谈论自己的喜好。 ◆ 谈谈流行文化，了解各类电影和电视节目的名称。 ◆ 了解一些日常生活用品，描述对其喜好程度。
3、策略目标 利用不同媒体获取相关的学习资源，通过合作、探究的方式学习;学会正确评价自己的学习行为和学习效果。
4、情感目标 ◆ 学会客观地评价事物。 ◆ 正确表达自己的意见。 ◆ 正确认识流行文化。 ◆ 了解中西文化在表达自己的观点时存在很大差异——我们比较委婉，而西方人则更直接一些。
教学重难点
1、重点 学习及掌握陈述自己的看法，意见及喜好的词汇和基本句型。
2、难点 正确运用What do you/does he/she think of,,?及I love/like/don’t like/don’t mind/can’t stand ... He/She loves/likes/doesn’t like/doesn’t mind/can’t stand ...等句型结构来表达对客观事物的评价。
教学工具
多媒体
教学过程
Step1 Warming up
学生观看Movie。 观看Movie，引起学生的兴趣，促 使学生尽快进入英 语状态，同时也作 为一个lead in的活动。
Step2 Presentation(1)
1，由Magic English的观看，提出“Do you like Pluto’s music?”及” What do you think of Pluto’s music?”引出话题。
2. 在多媒体上呈现电影“Harry Potter”等学生们熟悉的电 影Posters，谈论对这些影片的喜好，句型结构如下： What do you think of ,,? I don’t mind it. I don’t like it. I can’t stand it.
3. 借助2中的Posters，运用what kind of movies do you like?及What do you think of,,?练习复数状态下的结构。
话题贴近学生生 活，学生能运用已 有的知识进行交 际，并自然地运用 新的知识点交际。 导入由易而难，遵循语言习得的规 律Learning by doing第一层次的 机械操练。
Step3 Practice
在多媒体上呈现一些现象，如随地吐痰、打架、乱扔废纸、排队候车等等，进行巩固练习。 操练，同时进行了一次有效的moral education。
Step4 Presentation(2)
1，由社会现象进入周末活动的谈论，what do you usually do on weekends?当有学生谈到watch TV时，开始介绍电视节 目的种类，播放电视节目的片断或图片。表达对各种电视节目的看法，可供选择的电视节目有： Talk shows, game shows, sports shows, soap opera, sitcom
2. Do 1a and 1b
新的语言点不集中在一起呈现，把他们分散开来，有助于学生掌握。
Step5 Pair work
就电视节目谈论彼此的观点，做pair work前，老师要先给学生一两个model，然后学生有准备过程，再进行pair work show。 练习的面广，给一般的同学创造安全的课堂。
Step6 Guessing game
(可用各种不同的计时方式) 老师陈述TV shows的情景，如：
1.A man is playing basketball.(sports show)
2.A funny show. The people on TV do or say things that make TV watchers laugh.(sitcom) 调节气氛，缓和学生的视觉及听觉疲劳，培养学生的判断力和信息的捕捉能力。
Step7Task
TV shows survey 学生可以在四人小组内，也可以离开座位询问其他同学，完成表格，再进行report。
Report: My friend,,likes,,. He/She also likes,,. But he can’t stand,,
Step8 Homework
1，Copy the new words and new sentences.
2.Make your report better. 课堂任务活动向课外延伸，同时课外作业贴近学生生活，激活了学生的兴趣和创新精神。
3. Survey what your family think of different TV shows, and make a new dialogue about that with your partner.
课后习题
一，选择适当的单词完成句子。
with, of, for, to, about
1. My father works in the bank. How
______ your father?
2. Thanks _____showing me your nice
photos.
3. Hello, everyone! Welcome ____ our
school.
4. What does she think ____ the new
movie?
5. Ms Chen agreed ________ what I said.
二，翻译
1. - 你认为情景喜剧怎么样?
- 我非常喜欢它们。
2. - 他认为肥皂剧怎么样?
- 他无法忍受它们。
3. 布朗夫人不介意别人对她的看法。
4. 这些女孩喜欢用英语唱这首歌。
5. 我无法忍受做饭。
板书
Unit 11 What do you think of game shows?
What do you think of talk shows?
I don’t mind them.
What about game shows?
I love them.
Do you like sitcoms?
Yes, I do.
频道小编推荐： |
七年级下册英语课件【篇3】
教学目标
1. 语言知识目标：
1) 能掌握以下单词： newspaper, use, soup, wash, movie, just
能掌握以下句型：
① —What are you doing? —I'm watching TV.
② —What's he doing? —He's using the computer.
③ —What are they doing? —They're listening to a CD.
④ —This is Jenny. —It's Laura here.
2) 能掌握语法：现在进行时态的用法。
3) 能运用所学的知识，描述人们正在干的事情。
教学重难点
1. 教学重点：
1) 词汇、词组搭配和现在进行时的用法。能用现在进行时的各种形式进行准确的描述和表达正在发生的动作。
2) 能掌握现在进行时态及一些表示具体动作的词组搭配,如: doing homework, using the computer, watching TV, eating dinner… 等
2. 教学难点：
现在进行时中现在分词的结构及读音，能在交际中准确地运用现在进行时来描述或表达正在进行的动作。
教学工具
多媒体
教学过程
Ⅰ. Warming-up and Lead in
1. Greet the Ss and check the homework.
2. Watch a video program.
Ⅱ. Presentation
1. Show some pictures on the big screen. Present the new words and expressions.
2. Ss watch and learn the new words and expressions.
3. Give Ss some time and try to remember the new words and expressions.
4. (Show some pictures on the screen and ask some students to perform the actions.)
e.g. T: What are you doing?
S: I am doing homework. (Help him/her to answer)
T: What is he /she doing?
Ss: He /she is doing homework.
Teach: watching TV, cleaning, reading a book, eating dinner, talking on the phone...as the same way.
5. Work on 1a. Ss read the activities and look at the pictures. Then match the activities with pictures.
6. Check the answers with the Ss.
Ⅲ. Game (guess)
1. T: Now let's play a game. What's she/he doing? You must watch the big screen carefully.
(Show some pictures on the big screen quickly) Let Ss guess what's he/she is doing?
2. Ss watch and guess the actions.
3. Ask and answer about the pictures.
—What's he/she doing?
—He's/She's …
Ⅳ. Listening
1. T: What are Jenny, John, Dave and Mary doing? Now let’s listen to the tape, find out the right activities from 1a.
2. Play the recording for the Ss twice.
3. Ss listen to the recording and write the numbers from 1a.
Ⅴ. Pair work
1. Ask the Ss to read the conversations in 1c with a partner. Then look at the pictures in 1a. And conversations about other person in the picture.
2. Ss make conversations by themselves and practice the conversations.
Ⅵ. Listening
1. Work on 2a;
T: Jack and Steve are talking on the phone. What are they doing now? Listen to the conversations and match the answers with the questions.
(Play the recording for the first time, students only listen carefully. Then, listen to the recording again, and match the answers with the questions. )
Check the answers.
2. Work on 2b.
Let Ss read the conversation in 2b first. Then play the recording for the Ss twice.
The first time Ss only listen and write down the words in the blanks. Then play the recording again for the Ss to check the answers. (If necessary, press the Pause button to help.)
Ⅶ. Pair work
1. Now, role-play the conversation with your partners.
2. Let some pairs to act out the conversation in front of the class.
Ⅷ. Role-play
1. Ask Ss to read the conversation in 2d and answer the questions below.
① Are Jenny and Laura talking on the phone?
(Yes, they are.)
② What's Laura doing now?
(She's washing her clothes.)
③ What's Jenny doing?
(She's watching TV.)
④ When do they meet at Jenny's home?
(At half past six.)
2. Ss read the conversation and answer the questions above.
3. Check the answers with the Ss.
4. Let Ss work in pairs and role-play the conversation.
Homework:
1. Review the words and expressions in this period.
2. Understand the knowledge about the present progressive tense.
3. Make five sentences on what are you doing now.
七年级下册英语课件【篇4】
一、Teaching aims (教学目的)
1.检查考完试后所学的单词，巩固学习新单词。
2.学习几个日常交际用语，where,what引导的特殊疑问句。
二、Key points (本课重点)
1. Words:pen pal, Australia, Japan, Canada, France, the United states, Singapore, the United Kingdom, country, Sydney, New York, Paris, Toronto, Tokyo
2.Where is your pen pal from? He‟s from Australia.Where does he live? He lives in. Paris3.Where is John‟s pen pal from ?
三、Teaching aids (教学方法)
Using what you know, deducing。Some cards with cities and countries.
四、Teaching procedures (教学过程)
Step 1 Greeting T: Good morning! S:… T: Let‟s start now.
Step 2 Presentation
1.教师让学生合上书，认真听老师与学生的对话，教师找一名学生与自己对话T: Good morning ! What countries and cities do you know? ( Ss can speak in Chinese.)S: ………Learn the new words.Countries:China, Australia, Japan, Canada, France, the United States, the United Kingdom, SingaporeCities: Shanghai, Sydney, Tokyo, Toronto, Paris, New York, London, Singapore
2.同样的方法，通过师生对话的方式引导出新句型，Where are you from ? I am from China . Where „s your pen pal from? He is from ……
2 Step 3 Practice
1.同桌两人练习，并交换角色操练
2.老师在班内进行连锁式提问，看看学生对本课内容掌握情况，随时纠正学生出现的错误。
Step 4 Consolidation
1.Listen and circle the countries in 1a , 2b,2c.
2.Play a game: Find the right cards with countries and cities .
3.让学生自己找搭档，两人一组编对话，然后表演。
S1: Hello S2: Hello S1: My name is xxx. Where are you from ? S2: I am from xxx. Oh, where are you from ? S1: Where do you live ? S2: I live in ……Where do you live ? S1: ……S2:……Step 5 Summary
1.让学生总结所学内容
2.预习下一节(Section A 3a—4)Homework:
1.熟练运用本堂课所学内容。
2.自编对话，下堂课表演对话。
频道小编推荐： |
七年级下册英语课件【篇5】
教学目标
知识与能力
1. Match the vocabulary：New York City，Central Park，exam.
2. Master and use：Where did you/ they /he / she go，vacation? I / They /He /She went to the mountains\New York City\beach\summer camp.
Did you go to the beach? Yes，I did.No, I didn’t.
过程与方法
通过例子Who went to the movies last Saturday?引出动词go的过去式went，从而引出一般过去时态。大面积操练，采用学生提出间题，学生解决问题，借助媒体来提高学生的主动性。
情感态度价值观
学会用一般过去时进行信息交流，培养学生的环保意识，热爱大自然。
教学重难点
l. The vocabulary：New York City, Central Pads，exam.
2. Language：Where did you/they/he/she go on vacation? I/They/He/She went to the mountains/ New York City/ beach /summer camp
Did you go to the beach? Yes，I did. No, I didn’t.
难点
Use the language to talk about past events.
教学工具
课件
教学过程
step 1Organization1’
Organize Ss by saying hello to each other.
Step 2Free talk(2’)
Ask the question:
Who is on duty?
Is everyone here today?
Step 3Section APresentation
la 1.(Ask questions about what students
did last Saturday)
(1)Who went to the movies last Saturday?
(Point to one student who raises his or her hand.)
Sara went to the movies last Saturday.
(Repeat.Write this sentence on the board. Underline the word went.)
(2) Ask：Who visited a friend last Saturday?
(Point to one student who raises his or her hand.)
Carlos visited a friend last Saturday.
(Repeat.Write this sentence on the board. Underline the word visited.)
2.(Point to the words went and visited in the sentences on the board.)
Say，We use these words to talk about things that happened in the past.
(Write these pairs of words on the board：go--went, visit --visited)
Ask: Can you point out the words that talk about the past?
This activity introduces the key vocabulary.
Step 4Practisela3’
1.Focus attention on the picture.Ask:
What at can you see?Say, Each picture shows something a person did in the past.Name each activity and ask students to repeat;Went to the mountains，went to New York City, went to summer camp，visited my uncle，stayed at home，went to the beach，visited museums.
2.Point to the numbered list of activities.Say each one again and ask the students to repeat.
3.Now, please match each phrase with one of the pictures.Say，Write the letter of each picture next to the name of the activity.Point to the sample answer.
4.Check the answers.
Answers：
1.e 2.B 3.D 4. c 5.a 6.F 7. g
step 5Listening(lb)(6’)
Presentation This activity gives students practice in understanding the target language in spoken conversation.
1.Point to the picture.
on the screen
say, look at Picture A，Where did Tia go on vacation? Yes，she went to the mountains.
Ask，What did the person do in each scene?
2.Play the recording the first time.
3.Play the recording a second time.
say，There are three conversations.
The people talk about what they did on vacation.listen to the recording and write numbers of the names in the right boxes in the picture.
Please write only 5 numbers. Point out the
sample answer next to the picture showing went to the mountain.
4.Correct the answers.
ANSWERS：
(1) went to the mountains
(2)visited my uncle
(3)stayed at home
(4) went to New York City
(5)went to summer camp
Tape script：
Conversation 1
Xiang Hun: Hey, Tina. Where did you go on vacation?
Tina: I went to the mountains.
Xiang Hua: Cool.
Tina: Where did you go, Xiang Hua?
Xiang Hua：I went to New York City.
Conversation 2
Girl: Where did you go on vacation, Sally?
Sally：No where. I stayed at home.
Girl: And where did you go, Brad?
Brad: I visited my uncle.
Conversation 3
Boy 1：Where did you go on vacation, Tom?
Tom: I went to summer camp. It was great.
Pronunciation note
Write to play---played, visit ---visited on the board.Say，We studied the pronunciation of these --- ed endings in Unit 5.
They are both spelled --- ed，but we pronounce one /d/ and the other /Id/.Ask students to repeat these pairs：play-played，visit一visited.
Step 6 Pair work 1 c(task 1)3’
This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language.
1. Point out the example conversation.
Ask two students to read the dialogue to the class.
2. Say，Now work with a partner. You’re your own conversation about the pictures.
3. Say the dialogue in the picture with a student，Do a second example to the class.
4. Have students work in pairs.
As they talk，move around the room monitoring their work.
Offer language or pronunciation support as needed.
Step 7 Consolidation(4’)
This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language.
2c, group work
(Task2) 1.Say, Get into getups of three. One of you will he Nancy，One will be Marco, and one will be Julie. Ask each other about the vacations. You can talk about the activities from the chart in 2b or about any other activities you like.
2.As Ss talk, move around the room, monitoring the conversations and offering support as needed.
3. Have a group of Ss present their conversation to the class.
Step 8Test 4' Loot at test
Step 9 Summary Grammar Focus4’
1. Review the grammar box. Ask Ss to say the questions and answers.
2. Review the difference between regular –ed past tense verbs (stay –stayed, visited). Then say the past form sentences with the form below.
I go to the summer camp
They go to New York City
He stay at home
She visit her uncle
Go to Central Park
Step 10Homework
Practice the dialogue according to the picture on Page 1
课后小结
学了这节课，你有什么收获?
课后习题
完成课后练习题。
板书
Unit 10 Where did you go on vocation?
七年级下册英语课件【篇6】
教学目标
Key words: short, curly, long, tall, straight hair, a medium build, thin, heavy, bald;
brown, blonde;
glasses, hair, beard, mustache.
New language:
What do you look like? I’m short. And I have curly hair.
What do they look like? They’re medium height. And they have short hair.
What does he look like? He’s heavy and he wears glasses.
What does she look like? She’s thin and she has long hair.
教学重难点
Importance: Describing people. Such as tall or short… and who has long hair and short hair…
Difficulties: use the sentences correctly to describe the physical appearance.
III. Teaching Steps:
教学工具
课件
教学过程
Step 1 Greetings
Step 2 Ask some students to name some ways of describing people. Start students off with examples such as tall and short. Point out various students in the class and ask students to say if they are tall or short.
Step 3 Some new words about this part
(1a) This activity introduces the key vocabulary. Ask students to read the list of words. Point to the letters next to the people in the picture. Point out the sample answer. At last, check the answers.
(1b) This activity provides guided listening and writing practice the target language.
Play the recording the first time, then , play it again, this time, students fill in the blanks in the speech bubbles.
Correct the answers.
Language points: 1.He’s the tall boy with the curly hair.
(1c)This activity provides guided oral practice using the target language. Ask the students to ask and answer the questions. Then have students work in pairs. As they talk, move around the room monitoring their work.
Language points:
2.What does your friend look like?你的朋友长得什么样?
look like “看起来像，看起来是……的样子”like 作介词，意为“像….”
eg. What’s he like?
Jack is very like his father.
look like 看起来像 The girl look like her mother.
look 看起来 后加形容词作表语 His sister looks happy.
look the same 看起来很像 The twins look the same.
(2a)This activity provides guided listening practice using the target language.
Point to the list of nice phrases and ask a students to read them to the class. Play the recording twice. And complete the answers. Then correct the answers.
(2b)Ask the students to listen to the descriptions and write the words in the correct column after each person’s name.
(3)Writing practice: Have students do the activity individually. Offer help as necessary.
(Grammar focus) Review the grammar box. Ask students to read the questions and answers. Point out: ①does, goes-----you, they do, go--------he, she.
②I’m, they’re, he’s and she’s -----height
(3a)This activity provides reading practice using the target language. Have a student read the first description. Check the answers.
Language points:
3.She has a medium build, and she has long hair. 她体格中等，留着长发。
①medium ,adj.中间的，中等的，普通的 a man of medium height medium size
②build 多用作动词，但在句中是名词，意为体格。
His uncle is a man of strong build.
They are building a new school.
③hair 常用作集合名词，“头发，毛发”
Mr Green has blond hair.
His mother’s hair is turning gray.
如果侧重指(一根一根的)头发，有其复数形式hairs.
My father has quite a few gray hairs.
4.She’s good-looking but she’s a little bit quiet. 她很漂亮，但是有点不大爱说话。
①a little bit 常用于口语中，“稍微，有些，少许”相当于副词。接近于a little.
It’s a little bit cold today.
I feel a little tired now.
This shirt is a little too large for me.
②quiet 是形容词，“寡言的，稳重的，温顺的”
His daughter is a quiet child.
③good-looking, beautiful, pretty与handsome
good-looking 常用于指容貌美，beautiful 表示接近和谐理想的美; pretty并非表示完美无缺的意思，而是着重表示“可爱，令人怜爱”;handsome 指容貌端正英俊的，形容女性时，作“健美的”。他们常用于一些特定的人或事物。
项目-词汇 beautiful pretty good-looking handsome
women(女性) √ √ √ √
man (男性) × × √ √
child(小孩) √ √ √ ×
bird(鸟) √ √ × ×
flower(花) √ √ × ×
village(村庄) √ √ × ×
picture(画) √ √ × ×
dress(服装) √ √ × ×
voice(声音) √ × × ×
5.Xu Qian loves to tell jokes .俆倩喜欢说笑话。
①love 在本句中为“喜欢， 热爱”常可用于“love+doing/ to do”的结构中。
His brother loves jazz.
Miss Read loves her cat more than anything else.
They all love to dance .
love 作动词还常表示为“爱，疼爱，爱惜”
They both love each other.
②tell jokes 意思为“说笑话”，类似的短语还有 tell a story, tell a lie, tell the truth.
6.She never stops talking.他从来都是喋喋不休的说。
①never 是副词，意思为“决不，永不，从未，一点也不”
never 通常置于一般动词之前，be动词、助动词之后。
I never get up early Sunday morning.
She is never late for school.
有时置于句中特定词(短语)之前，以强调该词的否定意味。
They spoke never a word to each other.
never 可依置于命令动词之前。
Never eat too much.
②stop doing / stop to do
stop 后接动名词，表示停下动名词所指的动作; stop 后接不定式，表示停下其他事情，去做不定时所指的动作。
He stopped drinking water. 他停下(不再)喝水。
He stopped to drink water. 他停下(停下手)来喝水。
7.He likes reading and playing chess. 他喜欢读书下棋。
①read 多指看文字性的东西，“看”实际上就是“读”，作及物动词和不及物动词都可以。
Children usually like reading picture-books.
Don’t read in the sun.
②look 为不及物动词，后面接宾语时，需用介词at,表示看的过程，强调有意识的动作，多用来唤起别人的注意。
Look! Who’s the man under the tree?
③see 能用作及物动词后接宾语，也可用作不及物动词，着重于看的结果，“看到，看见”
但不一定是有意识的。由于see强调的是结果，所以一般不用于进行时态中。
Can you see the kite in the tree?
固定搭配：see a doctor see a film
④watch 为及物动词，用来指非常仔细的、有目的或特意的动作,表示“注视、观看、监视”。
My parents often watch me do my homework..
The teacher often watch them playing games.
注意：看电视，看比赛 习惯上多用watch表示，即：watch TV, watch a game.
⑤play chess 意思为下棋，play常可作“比赛，竞赛”等，但要注意，play 与比赛、游戏用在一起时，比赛游戏前不加冠词。
Let’s play football after school.
Look! They are playing cards under the tree.
(3b)Practice the target language.
Have two students read out the example dialogue in the speech bubbles. And then have several pairs present their dialogues to the class.
(4)Ask some students to describe a person while their classmates guess who it is.
Step 4 Do some exercises to practice.
Step 5 Blackboard design
Step 6.Homework.
① Read all the words and remember the key words and can use freely.
②Say some sentences about one person’s appearance.
课后小结
学了这节课，你有什么收获?
课后习题
完成课后练习题。
七年级下册英语课件【篇7】
教学目标
Teaching aims (教学目标)
1. 学习祈使句的否定形式。
2. 学会使用祈使句表示规则。
3. 能够熟练使用can和can’t表示许可。
4. 能和同学谈论校规。
教学重难点
Language points (语言点)
1. 词汇：1)名词n. rule, hallway, hall, fight
2) 动词v. arrive, listen, fight, wear
3) 形容词 adj. sorry, outside
4) 词组 be on time, dining hall, listen to…
2. 句型：What are the rules? We can’t …./Don’t …/We have to …
Can we … ? Yes, we can./No, we can’t.
What do you have to do? We have to …
Difficulties (教学难点)
1.祈使句的否定形式。
2. 如何谈论规则。
教学过程
Teaching steps (教学步骤)
1. Warm-up and revision(课堂热身和复习)
(1)Greet the class.
(2) Listen to a song.
T: Do you like this beautiful song?
Can we listen to it in class?
T: Can we listen to music in the classroom?
What can we do in the classroom?
What can’t we do in the classroom?
【教学设计说明】通过听歌曲来导入本单元的主要话题——规则。让学生自由谈论在教室里可以做的事情和不可以做的事情，帮助学生培养秩序感。
2. Presentation (呈现新知识)
(1) Present the new words: classroom, hallway, dining room, fight, arriv e late for class.
Show some pictures of the new words on the screen. Have Ss read these words.
classroom, hallway, dining room, fight, arrive late for class
(2) Flash some pictures quickly on the screen. Have Ss say the words according the pictures as quickly as they can.
(3) Show some pictures of different activities that are happening in the school.
Help Ss understand the school rules.
T: Can you run in the hallways? Don’t run in the hall ways.
T: Can you fight? Don’t fight.
T: Can you listen to music in class? Don’t listen to music in class.
T: Can you eat in the classroom? Don’t eat in the classroom.
You can only eat in the dining hall.
T: Can you arrive late for class? Don’t arrive late for class.
You must be on time.
【教学设计说明】图片教学法是呈现新知识最简单有效的方法之一，学生通过图片，能更价值观的理解新单词的含义。此环节重点在新单词及词组的意思和发音上，所以要尽量让更多的学生张口说，必要的机械操练是必不可少的。
3. Drill (练习)
Show the pictures as quickly as possible. Have Ss say the new words. Then use the new words to make conversations.
T: Let’s play a game. Please say the new words as quickly as you can. Then make a conversation like this:
A: What are the rules?
B: Don’t …
【教学设计说明】此环节为机械操练，使不同层次学生初步掌握目标语言。机械操练是英语初始阶段教学必不可缺的部分，学生要先从模仿到初步掌握，最后才能熟练应用。机械操练时应注意着重提问成绩较差的学生，由于机械操练比较简单，因此是激发后进生兴趣，培养后进生自信的一个很好的途径。
4. Work on 1a (完成1a)
(1) Which rules are these Ss breaking? Write the number of the rule
next to the student.
(2) Talk about the picture with Ss using the target language.
【教学设计说明】通过1a的练习，使学生进一步学会运用新单词。和学生一起谈论图片，目的在于引导学生学会使祈使句表示规则。
5. Work on 1b (完成1b)
(1)Listen. What rules are these Ss breaking? Write the numbers after the names.
(2) Student A is a new student. Student B tells Student A about the rules. Make conversations with your partner.
A: What are the rules?
B: Well, we can’t arrive late for class. We must be on time.
【教学设计说明】此环节着重是听力训练。让学生在听对话的过程中抓住关键词汇，由于前面已做了一些训练，因此学生听起来比较容易，让他们都有一次成功的喜悦和感受，这样可以增强他们的学习自信心。
6. Work on 2a & 2b (完成2a和2b)
(1)T: Please turn to page 20. Look at the activities in 2a and read them aloud.
(2)T: Listen. Check the activities Alan and Cindy talk about.
(3)T: Can you get the answers? Listen again and check your answers.
(4)T: Listen again. Can Alan and Cindy do these activities? Circle can or can’t.
【教学设计说明】此环节进一步巩固了本堂课所学的词汇和句型。通过反复听读，可以让学生尽快熟悉生词。帮助学生掌握情态动词can表示许可的用法。
7. Work on 2c (完成2c)
Student A is Alan and Student B is Cindy. Talk about the rules in 2a.
A: Can we listen to music, Cindy?
B: We can’t listen to music in the hallways, but we can listen to it outside.
【教学设计说明】此环节既能充分练习学生的目标语言，使学生学以致用，同时也能极大的调动学生们的课堂参与率.
七年级下册英语课件【篇8】
教学目标
1.学习和巩固一些有关食品的名称;了解面条及其配料。
noodles beef mutton chicken cabbage tomato potato special
2.掌握would like (‘d like)的用法及句型What kind of…would you like?(你想要什么种类的物品啊?)
3.初步培养学生有关“订餐”的交际能力;能自配美餐。
培养学生养成爱惜粮食、讲究卫生的良好习惯。
教学重难点
教学重点(Teaching Key Point)
运用目标语言订购食品：
---Can I help you?
---Yes, please.
---What kind of noodles would you like?
---I’d like beef and tomato noodles.
教学难点(Teaching Difficulty):
培养学生的口语交际能力。
教学工具
课件
教学过程
Step 1 Greetings and free talk
Step 2 Show the learning aims. Meanwhile explain some words using real objects or pictures.
Step 3 Leading in Course
Show students a toy dog and ask them if they like it.
Ask students: What kind of animals do you like ?
Students answer: I like …
Ask students: What kind of animals would you like?
Students answer: I would like…
(Tell students “would like” is similar to “want”. But “would like” is more polite than “want”.)
Step 4 New lesson
1.Show students a screen with some more animals. Ask each animal’s name . Then use the sentence structure” What kind of …would you like? I’d like …”Finally, pointing to any animal, get boy students to ask and girl students to answer.
2.Show students another screen with some vegetables. Do this task as the former step .to help students consolidate the structure.
3.Show students a screen with some kinds of food. and continue to practice the structure.
4.Show students a screen with some different kinds of meat. Students practice the structure.
(在传授这些知识的同时，教育学生学会生活：了解人体每天对几种主要营养的需求量，学会健康饮食)
5.Pair work
Students use the sentence structure to make their own conversations.
---What kind of …would you like?
---I’d like …
6.Design a scene:
“I work in a restaurant. I am selling several kinds of noodles. (Some specials) A costumer comes to order noodles.”
(1).Show the specials to students and explain the ingredients of each special.
(2).Get students to listen to a conversation and choose one of the specials the costumer orders
(3).Students work in pairs or in groups to practice conversations, trying to order food.
7.Exercise
Order some sentences to form a conversation.
8.Summary of this lesson
9.Self-assessment
Get students to finish the self-assessment chart
10.Homework
Dispense a healthy lunch for yourself.
Make a bowl of noodles for your parents when you get home.
课后小结
学了这节课，你有什么收获?
课后习题
完成课后练习题。
板书
I’d like some noodles.
noodles What kind of …do you like?
beef I like …
mutton What kind of …would you like?
cabbage I’d like…
potatoes
tspecial
七年级下册英语课件【篇9】
unit3 last weekend
第四课时 教学设计
一、教学设计思路
本课时的主要教学内容是不规则动词go的过去式以及有关环保的一些常见标志。本课时中，教师可以首先通过free talk带领学生一起巩固前几节课的动词短语过去式和句型；然后，通过教师介绍自己昨天的活动引入不规则动词read及go的过去式，went to a park, went swimming, went fishing, went hiking都是有关go的过去式，因此，教师可以只向学生介绍其中一个短语的过去式，然后让学生自己分析并举一反三；最后，通过看图讨论一些重大发明来进一步巩固过去式短语及句型。
二、教学目标
（一）知识
听、说、读、写短语：went to a park, went swimming, read a book, went fishing, went hiking。
听、说、认读句子：What did you do yesterday I went hiking.（二）能力
能够在实际情景中运用以上短语及句型。
能够理解并会唱 “At the Zoo”。
能够熟悉Good to know中的标志。
（三）情感
通过熟悉Good to know部分，增强学生的环保意识。
三、教学重点
短语went to a park, went swimming, read a book, went fishing, went hiking的听、说、读、写。
难点：掌握不规则动词的过去式形式。
四、教学媒体
1．Let’s learn部分短语图片及Good to know部分四个标志牌的图片。
2．录音机和本课时的磁带。
4．有关重大发明挂图。
3．教学课件
五、教学过程
1．导入
1）Daily Greeting
2）Free talk
T: What day is today?
A: Today is…
T: What day was yesterday?(强调 yesterday)
B: Yesterday/ It was…
T: What did you do yesterday?
C: I(did)…yesterday.(用前几课时已经学的词组)
3）教师播放歌曲本单元歌曲 “At the Zoo”，让学生欣赏。
2．呈现新课
1）Let’s learn
T: What did you do yesterday?
…
T: Who read a book yesterday?（教师做出读书的动作，帮助学生理解）…
教师分别说句子：I often read a book in the evening.I read a book yesterday.让学生去发现两个句子中read发音的不同。
教师一张张呈现go to a park, go swimming, read a book, go fishing, go hiking的图片，让学生先复习这些动词短语原形。
教师让学生看课本P31 Amy和Bai Lin的对话：
教师扮演Amy，让一名学生扮演Bai Lin，进行对话：
S: What did you do yesterday?
T: I went hiking.教师重复两边I went hiking.教师让学生发现went与go的关系。
让学生进行举一反三练习：假如以上提到有关go的动词短语是学生昨天的活动，教师进行提问
T: What did you do yesterday?
…（学生任选以上go短语进行回答）
教师根据学生对went的掌握情况调整教学。
2）Let’s play
将学生分组，4-6人一组，按照Let’s play部分自制表格，人物为该小组的成员。边对话边记录，然后做成表格再进行对话练习。
最后，教师鼓励各个小组将表格内容进行整体表述，形成一篇小短文，并进行表达。
3）Let’s sing
T: I went to the zoo yesterday.What did I see? Do you want to know?
Ss: …
T: Ok, let’s sing the song and let’s see what saw at the zoo.教师播放歌曲录音，学生听录音哼唱两边后跟录音齐唱。
然后，男女生对唱或按座位分组对唱。
4）Good to know
教师出示准备好的各种标志牌，请学生讲讲各标志的含义（本部分的四个标志牌分别表示：No fishing, No swimming, No dogs peeing, No dogs pooping），和学生一起讨论环境保护的重要性。鼓励学生课下自己设计一些标志图，下节课带来全班一起传阅。
3．趣味操练
活动：看图讨论
活动目的：练习运用一般过去时陈述过去的重大发明。
活动准备：一幅呈现着多种发明的大挂图。
活动过程：将挂图张贴在黑板上。将学生分成四组来分别讨论，并简单地用英语来陈述挂图上各种发明的时间、地点及发明人。然后向全班同汇报。看哪一组同学知道得多，陈述得准确。
4．课堂评价
完成本课时活动手册的相关练习，评价学生对不规则动词过去式形式的掌握情况。另外，教师在学生完成Let’s play任务及看图讨论中体现学生的自我评价及教师对各小组的评价。
5．课后作业
练习本课时的重点词汇，收集生活中常见的标志。
七年级下册英语课件【篇10】
教学目标
1. 谈论规则
2. 祈使语气
3. 表示允许
4. 能够用口头或书面描述规则
教学重难点
教学重点和难点：
重点掌握祈使语气的用法，包括表示允许的Can及其当情态动词用的 have to do;以及各种可以用在表述规章制度的动词和句型。难点在于情态动词的用法，以及祈使句与它的应答。
教学工具
课件
教学过程
Task One:
Talk about school rules to “feel” Imperatives
Goal：Get to know about the structure to express rules
Step 1: Talk about the school rules they know / remember
Step 2: Look at the picture and read the rules in Section A – 1a, telling the difference between yours
Step 3: Add more rules to your school, which you think necessary
Task Two:
Listen and find out what Ss can do and what they cannot
Goal: Try to understand the rules by listening
Step 1: Listen to conversations about the activities and find out what students can do and what they cannot do
Step 2: Listen to conversations about the activities and find out what Alex and Christina can do and what they cannot do→Section A (2a / b)
Step 3: Listen to conversations about the activities and find out what rules students break
→Section A (1b)
Step 4: Listen to the different rules that different people have to follow→Section B (2a / b)
Task Three:
Learn to read the signs for rules
Goal: Learn about the rules by reading the signs
Step 1: Learn about the rules by reading the pictures→Section B1
Step 2: Learn about the rules by reading the signs→Section B (3 b)
Step 3: Talk about the similarities or the differences about the signs between China and abroad
Task Four:
Write rules for libraries, labs, computer-rooms, and swimming pools etc.
Goal: Learn to take care of public things
Step 1:
Read the letter →Section B (3 a)
Find the rules in the letter
Write them down
Step 2:
Talk in pairs about the rules for public places, such as libraries, labs, computer-rooms, swimming pools, etc.
Discuss in groups about the rules for these public places
Write down what have been talked about / discussed
课后小结
学了这节课，你有什么收获?
课后习题
完成课后练习题。
板书
Unit 12 Don’t eat in class
频道小编推荐： |
七年级下册英语课件【篇11】
新目标英语七年级下册第十二单元教案作者：思全英语辅导新目标英语七年级下册第十二单元教案
教学重点和难点：
重点掌握祈使语气的用法，包括表示允许的Can及其当情态动词用的have to do；以及各种可以用在表述规章制度的动词和句型。难点在于情态动词的用法，以及祈使句与它的应答。
1.表示规则的句型：
*---Don't run in the hallways.
---Sorry,Ms Mendoza.
*Don't watch TV after school.
*Don't go out on school nights.
1.思考、谈论规则。
*Don't talk loudly.
*Do your homework after school！
*Practice your guitar every day.
引导、启发、教授需学内容。
2.Can for permission,such as：We can do….
We can't do….
Can we do…?
*---What are the rules?
---Well,we can't arrive late for class.
*---Can we listen to music,Alex?
---We can't listen to music in the hallways,
but we can listen to it outside.
2.听录音，回答问题。
*---Can we eat in the classroom?
---No,we can't.
*---Can students wear hats in school?
---Yes,they can.
放录音；启发、提示问题及答语。
3.阅读→迁移(读、写、文化差异)。
阅读/认图标；阅读信件→根据其信息找出规则→写出规则。
3.引导、提示图标含义；提示文化差异。
4.用口头或书面形式描述规则。
4.利用本单元所学祈使语气的用法，包括表示允许的'Can及其当情态动词用的have to do，根据常识或观察,为图书馆、生化实验室、语音室、机房、健身房、游泳馆等公共场所制定规章制度或使用规则。
4.检查学生讨论制定规章制度或使用规则情况--句型、短语、动词形式是否正确；指导并落实学生写作情况。
Talk about school rules to“feel”Imperatives Goal：Get to know about the structure to express rules Step 1：Talk about the school rules they know/remember Step 2：Look at the picture and read the rules in Section AC 1a,telling the difference between yours Step 3：Add more rules to your school,which you think necessary Task Two：
Listen and find out what Ss can do and what they cannot Goal：Try to understand the rules by listening Step 1：Listen to conversations about the activities and find out what students can do and what they cannot do Step 2：Listen to conversations about the activities and find out what Alex and Christina can do and what they cannot do→Section A(2a/b)
Step 3：Listen to conversations about the activities and find out what rules students break
Step 4：Listen to the different rules that different people have to follow→Section B(2a/b)
Task Three：
Learn to read the signs for rules Goal：Learn about the rules by reading the signs Step 1：Learn about the rules by reading the pictures→Section B1 Step 2：Learn about the rules by reading the signs→Section B(3 b)
Step 3：Talk about the similarities or the differences about the signs between China and abroad Task Four：
Write rules for libraries,labs,computer-rooms,and swimming pools etc.
Goal：Learn to take care of public things Step 1：
Find the rules in the letter Write them down Step 2：
Talk in pairs about the rules for public places,such as libraries,labs,computer-rooms,swimming pools,etc.
Discuss in groups about the rules for these public places Write down what have been talked about/discussed
任务型课程的设计要自始至终体现任务的要求与特点，尤其要确保任务的设计与完成是从简单重复逐步过渡到真实或接近真实。基于这一要求与特点，本课的四个任务先以谈论有关学校各项规章制度为话题，初步感受祈使句，以及如何表达规则；然后听(通过听那些能做、哪些不能做的事儿，体会情态动词can和can't的用法)、认(通过认图标，说出规则，并把说出的规则写下来)，最后根据常识或观察,为图书馆、生化实验室、语音室、机房、健身房、游泳馆等公共场所制定规章制度或使用规则。这样，通过完成这一系列任务，既使学生学会了如何描述规章制度，又渗透了对学生的情感教育：通过对公共场所制定规章制度,培养学生遵守公德、爱护公物的美德。同时，学生还可以学会发散思维，以扩展知识；口头及书面表达能力也可随之提高。
二、课后反思：
不足之处：图标展示得不够；还可通过图标渗透中外文化差异。
可取之处：全方位的训练了学生的听、说、读、写的能力。
教案点评：
本设计采用任务型教学模式，设置四个任务先以谈论有关学校各项规章制度为话题，初步感受祈使句，及如何表达规则；然后通过听，体会情态动词can和can't的用法，通过认图标，说出规则，最后为图书馆、实验室等公共场所制定规章制度或使用规则。通过完成这一系列任务，既使学生学会了如何描述规章制度，又渗透了对学生的情感教育。
七年级语文上册课件(实用6篇)
探索“七年级语文上册课件”了解更多关于这个主题的内容。教案课件是老师教学工作的起始环节，也是上好课的先决条件，每位老师都需要认真准备自己的教案课件。教案是帮助教师组织教学活动的重要工具。我们欢迎您来到我们的网站享受我们精彩的内容！
七年级语文上册课件(篇1)
确实，一部好的作品，就如同一本好的生活教科书，它能够陶冶人的情操和气质，叫人怎样做一个正直的人。知识就如浩瀚的海洋，一个人一生不可能把所有的书读完，更何况书也有好书和坏书之分，这就决定了我们读书要有选择。（板书课题：读书要有选择）今天我们就来学习如何选择我们所需要的书籍。
（二）、指导学生选择图书
1、了解选择图书的渠道
（1）过渡：从哪儿可以得到我们所需要的图书呢？
（2）指导学生看第1页上面的插图，说说这些同学在哪儿选择图书。
你们平时又是怎样得到自己所需要的图书的呢？（指名说）
2、指导学生应如何选择图书
（1）过渡：应该如何选择图书呢？我们来看第1页最上面的图，这位同学是根据什么选择图书的呢？
（2）教师讲述：为了方便读者选择图书，图书馆（室）或书店的图书都是分类摆放的，比如《学生辞海》就是“字典、辞典”类的，《故事大王》就是“故事”类的，《十万个为什么》就是“科学”类的。我们要选择自己所需要的书，首先要确定是属于哪一类，然后在书架上按类查找。
（3）过渡：确定好自己所需图书是哪一类后，又应该怎样在书架上查找我们自己所需要的书呢？
（4）教师出示一排用书夹夹好的书，从中轻轻抽出一本书，边指边讲述：哪儿是封面，哪儿是书脊，书脊告诉了我们书名，我们可以通过看书脊上的书名确定是否是自己需要的书，不必一本本拿下来看封面上的书名。
（5）指导学生观察书上第1页上面的圆形特写图。找到自己需要的书以后，应该怎样拿书？怎样放回去？为什么要这样拿书呢？（指名说）
小结：找到自己需要的书后，要从书架上轻轻抽出来，也要轻轻放回去，防止图书卷角，保持图书整洁。
（6）指导学生观察第1页下面的图。
谁来说说图上这位同学在干什么？（指名说）
小结：找到自己所需要的书以后，还要打开看一看内容提要或者大致浏览一下内容，以便最后确定是否购买或借阅，如果不合适可以重新选择。
（7）教师示范。
教师按刚才讲述的方法，示范从讲台上的一排书中选取一本书。
（8）学生练习。
教师提出要求，点名让学生根据要求选择图书。
（三）、总结
学生总结，教师适当补充。
（四）、作业
课后，去书店或图书馆选择自己需要的书。
板书设计：
读书要有选择
一、确定自己需要的书
二、到图书馆借阅
第二课时
一、教学内容：读书要做记号
二、教学目标：
指导学生认真观察课本插图或教学挂图，使学生了解读书要做记号和如何作记号，初步掌握读书作记号的方法，培养不动笔墨不读书的良好习惯。
三、教学重、难点：
帮助学生初步掌握读书作记号的方法。
四、教学过程：
（一）、导入
上一堂课，我们学习了该如何选择图书。读书不但要有选择，而且要认真读，怎样认真读书呢？要做到“四到”：眼到、口到、手到、心到，边读边思考，还要边读边做记号，做到“不动笔墨不读书”。（板书课题：读书要做记号）
（二）、训练姿势
1、请同学们看第3页上面的图，说说这位女同学在干什么，这位同学是怎样坐的，怎样拿笔的，书摆放在什么位置，文具盒放在什么地方。（指名说）
小结：读书做记号的坐姿、执笔、放书的位置与写字时的姿势完全相同，读书做记号要有正确的姿势。
2、指导观察圆形特写图。
教师讲述：这是一位同学在一边读报一边做记号，谁来说说这位同学是怎样握笔的，
左手在干什么？（指名说）
3、请同学们拿起笔和语文书，翻到第3页，我们一起来向这位同学学习，像她那样有正确的读书（报）做记号的姿势。
学生摆姿势，教师巡视，及时纠正错误姿势。
（三）、指导学生读书做记号
1、过渡：读书时为什么要做记号呢？
教师讲述：读书做记号是一种重要的学习方法，也是一种良好的学习习惯，它可以帮助我们理解文字内容，突出理解重点，增强记忆效果，还便于今后查找、运用有关知识。
2、应该在哪些地方做记号，怎样做记号呢？我们一起来观察第2页的文字插图。
（1）谁来说说是在什么地方做记号的，是什么样的记号？指名把做记号的地方读一读。
（2）为什么要在这些地方做记号？（同桌讨论）
指名说，教师加以适当点拨。
3、小结学法：刚才我们观察了第2页《“东方之珠”》这篇课文的文字和记号，围绕“在什么地方做记号，做了哪些记号，为什么要在这些地方做记号”等问题进行了讨论，还把做记号的地方朗读了一遍。下面我们四人一组，按照刚才的方法来观察第2页的背景文字和第3页下面的文字画面。
4、分组讨论，指名说，指名朗读做记号的地方。
5、小结：通过刚才的学习，我们初步了解了读书做记号的方法。但读书时该在哪些地方做记号，要因文因人而异，常用的记号有哪些，我们将在第16课学习这些知识。读书做记号时，除了要注意有正确的读写姿势外，在书上做记号落笔要轻，要保持书页整洁，如果不是自己的书，就不要在上面做记号。
（四）、按要求阅读《语文补充阅读》中的文章，并作一定的记号
1、学生练习做记号，教师巡视，纠正错误姿势。
2、交流。
板书设计
什么地方
读书要做记号怎样做
什么样的记号
第三课时
一、教学内容：留心观察事物
二、教学目标：
通过指导观察课本插图或教学挂图，使学生初步了解留心观察事物的方法，培养学生留心观察事物的良好习惯。
三、教学重、难点：让学生了解留心观察事物的方法。
四、教学过程：
（一）、导入
同学们，你们还记得《学会查“无字词典”》这篇课文吗？聪聪的爸爸对他说：“不仅要学会查有字的词典，而且要学会查身边的无字词典。”查“无字词典”就是要求我们要留心观察事物。（板书课题）
（二）、学习观察静态物体的方法
1、我们一起来看第5页下面的图，谁愿意说一说，图上有什么人，他们在什么地方干什么，校园这一角有些什么景物？（指名说）
2、图上的同学观察得十分认真，留心观察事物有什么益处呢？（指名说，教师相机补充）
3、总结观察静态物体的方法。
校园一角的景物是静态的，应该怎样留心观察静物呢？
（1）同桌讨论。
（2）指名说。
（3）教师小结。
观察静物要注意以下四点：（板书）
1、要按一定顺序
2、要有重点
3、观察以后要展开想象
4、观察以后要动笔
5、下面请同学们运用刚才学到的方法，一起来留心观察图中校园的一角，说说你看到了什么。
（1）同桌互说。
七年级语文上册课件(篇2)
《论语》十则
教学目标
①掌握常用的文言实词，能用现代汉语翻译课文。
②理解课文思想内容，能流畅地朗读、背诵课文。
③积累成语、格言、警句。
教学重点
理解课文思想内容，能流畅地朗读、
课前准备
① 搜集资料：了解孔子及其儒家学说的概况;了解《论语》的主要内容;搜集最能表现松柏品性的诗句。
② 借助工具书，通读全文，把握内容梗概。
第一课时
教学内容
介绍孔子和《论语》，研读有关学习的内容。
教学设计
一、导入
中国是一个有着五千年文明史的礼仪之邦，在它源远流长的历史长河中，曾出现过不少光耀千古的文化巨人，为我们留下了极宝贵的文化遗产，如《论语》、《老子》、《孟子》、《庄子》、《荀子》等。这些著述对中华文化曾产生过深远影响，直至今天，仍光芒四射。下面我们就来共同探究学习《〈论语〉十则》。
交流有关孔子、《论语》的知识 ：
①学生在四人小组内交流。
②班上交流：每个知识点由一个同学介绍，其他同学作必要的修正、补充。
③师生交流：教师用多媒体展示自己搜集整理的资料。
1、孔子，名丘，字仲尼，春秋时期鲁国陬邑(今山东曲阜)人，是我国历史上伟大的思想家、教育家，儒家学派的创始人，被尊称为“大成至圣”。他对我国古代文化的整理、研究和传播，他的思想和学说，为中国文化乃至世界文明做出了不朽的贡献，联合国教科文组织把他列为世界十大名人之一。
2、《论语》是“语言的论纂”，也就是语录的意思，是记录孔子和他的弟子言行的一部书，共20篇，是儒家经典著作之一。体例主要是语录体、对话体、叙事体。内容上以教育为主，包括哲学、历史、政治、经济、艺术、宗教等方面。从中可以看出许多当时社会的政治生活情况，看出孔子和他的弟子们的人格修养、治学态度和处世方法。
二、研读课文
整体感知：
学生自读课文，思考本文内容主要包括哪两个方面。
学生交流后，教师概述：本文主要包括学习和个人修养两方面的内容，前五则着重谈学习，后五则着重谈修养做人。(有的地方内容上有交叉，教师应该在分析中给学生讲明。)
探究学习课文前五则
1、初读课文，扫除语言障碍
a.多媒体展示下列词句，先让同学读，其他同学评价，最后教师再打出正确读音。
人不知而不愠(yùn) 学而不思则罔(wǎng)
思而不学则殆(dài) 不亦说(yuè邑)乎
三省(xǐng)吾身 传(chuán)不习乎
诲女(rǔ)知之乎 不知为(wéi)不知 是知(zhì)也
让学生结合对课文的理解说出加点的词这样读的理由。
b.学生朗读课文，教师小结朗读文言文要注意的问题，(或用多媒体展示)：
◆结合具体语言环境，读准字音。
◆处理好停顿和语速、语调。
c.质疑交流：就课文字词句的理解，学习小组间互相质疑，提问组有权指定某组或某同学回答。
(对个别词句的理解，教师要加以点拨，并加以提炼、补充。)
★探究的词句摘要：(例)
温故而知新 可以为师矣 吾日三省吾身 为人谋而不忠乎
2、精读课文，探究课文思想内涵。
a.学生自主阅读。
教师要求学生思考：课文在学习态度上强调什么?学习方法上又强调什么?学生交流后，教师概述：学习态度强调要谦虚，学习方法强调独立思考与复习。
教师再要求学生思考：哪些语句强调谦虚，哪些语句是强调独立思考与复习，并分别说明理由。 (例1：谦虚：知之为知之，不知为不知，是知也。例2：独立思考、复习：学而不思则罔;温故而知新;传不习乎? )
b.班上讨论、交流以下两个问题：
◆在本文论述的教育思想中，你认为最有价值的是哪一点?为什么?
◆在学习生活中，你在哪一方面做得最不够，今后有何打算?
三、作业
① 必作：“研讨与练习”第一题。
② 选作：课外阅读《论语》，了解孔子的其他教育思想。
第二课时
教学内容
研读有关修身做人的内容，小结全文，背诵课文。
教学设计
一、导入
儒家学说是为己之学，追求道德的自我完善。下面我们来研读文中修身做人的内容。
二、探究学习后五则：
①全班朗读课文，教师正音。
②自主研读，疏通文意，理解主要内容。
③班上交流，重点研读以下几句：
a.岁寒，然后知松柏之后凋也。
b.士不可以不弘毅，任重而道远，仁以为己任，不亦重乎?死而后已，不亦远乎?
c.其恕乎!己所不欲，勿施于人。
[探究第一句]
请同学们讲这句话的字面意思。理解探究深层含义。交流写松柏的诗句，学生小组内交流后，教师用多媒体展示诗句。
教师要求学生回答：松柏有什么样的品性?要求学生讨论交流这句话的现实意义。
观点摘要：学习松柏高洁傲岸的品性，要经得起时间和环境的考验。 (要求学生找一个与这句话意思相近的成语、俗语。)
[探究第二、三句]
请同学翻译这两句话，其他同学评价、修正、补充。对重点词句教师要讲解。
请同学介绍儒家学说的思想核心及其代表人物;其他同学作必要的修正补充，要求点到为止。
联系生活实际，学习小组内讨论交流，怎样看待“己所不欲，勿施于人”。再由学习小组推举同学到班上交流。
观点摘要：
a.这样的处世之道可取，因为人本来就不应该把自己都不喜欢的东西强加于人;
b.这样的处世之道不可取，社会这个大家庭是由若干成员组成的，每个成员都有自己的喜好，有些东西也许我们都不喜欢，但又不得不要，比如监狱、死刑等。如果什么东西都要去考虑个人的喜好，这个社会的秩序就没法维持。
c.这样的处世之道既有可取之处，又有不可取之处，看你用这种处世态度来对待什么人、什么事。
三、小结
现代社会一方面经济飞速发展，另一方面传统美德亟待发扬。现代著名新儒学大师、美国哈佛大学杜维明教授在岳麓书院演讲时曾预言，公元20xx年左右，中华文化将全面复兴，就让我们拭目以待传统美德的蔚然成风吧!
朗读全文，加深对课文的理解。
四、积累、拓展
1、学生自由朗读，从文中找出自己最喜欢的成语、格言和警句，并说出理由。教师在学生交流后对本文出现的常用成语作归结并板书：死而后已 温故知新 任重道远 择善而从 三人行，必有我师
2、背诵课文
五、作业
搜集整理《论语》其他篇章中出现的成语、格言、警句2—3个，要求注明出处、含义，并制作资料卡在班上交流展览。
六、教后反思：
七年级语文上册课件(篇3)
【教学目标】
1、情感、态度与价值观：了解古代聪颖机智少年的故事，学习古人的智慧、诚实、守信，尊重他人的美德。
2、知识与能力：阅读浅易文言文，积累常见的文言词语。能借助注释和工具书理解基本内容。
3、过程与方法：自主、合作、探究的学习方式。
【教学重点】
诵读课文，积累文言词语。
【课前准备】
学生：准备古代聪颖机智少年的故事，上课交流。熟读课文，复述课文。查阅有关作者及作品的资料。
教师：查阅有关作者及作品的资料。教学方式：诵读、复述、疏通、讨论，多媒体辅助教学。
【教学内容】
这两个故事都是写古代聪颖少年的故事。《咏雪》讲的是晋朝著名文学世家谢氏家族里的一个故事。在一次家庭聚会中，谢道蕴表现出了咏絮之才。《陈太丘与友期》讲的是汉末名士陈纪七岁时，对父亲的朋友侃侃而谈的故事。两篇故事虽是文言文，但语言文字比较浅显，又是围绕着家庭生活和亲情，学生学习起来相对容易一些。
【教学设计】
课前两分钟训练(讲故事)。
请一名同学讲述“司马光砸缸”或其他故事。
一、导人
同学们，其实像司马光这样聪明的中国古代少年还有很多，如四岁画画的王冕、七岁做诗的曹植、十二岁做宰相的甘罗等。今天我再向大家介绍两位这样的古代少年，他们是谁呢?让我们一起来认识他们，和他们交个朋友。
学生简介作者及作品，教师补充。
参考资料：《世说新语》是六朝志人小说的代表作，古代小说所记大多是传闻、轶事，以短篇为主，在写法上一般都是直叙其事。《世说新语》全书原8卷，分德行、言语、政事、文学、方正、雅量等36门，《咏雪》选自“言语”一门，《陈太丘与友期》选自“方正”一门。
二、诵读课文
教师教读：由于学生文言文知识不够，诵读可能有一定困难，所以，教师要一句一句教读。教师教读时，要求学生边听边注意正音和句读，把握感情基调，体会语感。
学生自由练习朗读。要求把握人物对话的语气、表情，注意节奏。
学生分角色朗读，教师要加以指导，如句读、语调等。重点突出“读”的环节，力争当堂成诵。
过渡：在学生熟读课文的基础上，要求复述，为疏通课文打好基础。学生四人小组复述，也可以全班交流复述。
三、疏通文意
教师要求学生对照注释，默读课文，疏通文意，采用圈点勾画的方法把不理解的词句记录下来，如重点词语：“俄而”、“欣然”、“拟”、“未若”、“乃至”、“期行”等。把不理解的词句让学生提出来，全班一起讨论解决。必要时;教师精讲点拨。(教师要提示学生运用以前学过的加字法、换字法疏通文意。)
四、自主合作探究
教师导学：
1、以小组的形式采用自主、合作探究的学习方式，由学生质疑、讨论、解疑，教师巡回指导。
2、要求学生写下讨论笔记。把研讨中有代表性的和有难度的问题，以小组为单位，推选代表提出。全班讨论，得出结论。必要时，教师加以点拨。(可不必考虑学生提出问题的顺序，教师灵活把握，如重点问题尚未提出，可由教师提出。)
《咏雪》问题组：(可根据学生提出的问题而定)
⑴“寒雪”“内集”“欣然”“大笑”’等词语营造了一种怎样的家庭氛围?
⑵联系上下文，“儿女”的含义与今天有什么不同?
⑶文章结尾交待了谢道韫的身份，有什么用意?
多媒体投影下大雪的画面(让学生观察画面，再讨论分析。)
⑷撒盐空中、柳絮因风起两个比喻，哪一个更好?同时说说还可以用哪些事物来比喻雪。积累几句咏雪的名句。
学生从不同角度回答，教师给予鼓励。对于咏雪的名句，让学生拓展思维。
教师导学：以上的学习，同学们采用自主合作探究的学习方式，学习得很好。运用以上的学习方式学习下一篇，希望同学们的收获更大。
《陈太丘与友期》问题组：
⑴文中“君”、“家君”、“尊君”的称谓有什么不同?
⑵“期日中，过中不至”说明陈太丘的朋友是个怎样的人?元方义正辞严地指出了父亲的朋友的哪两点错误?
⑶元方“入门不顾”是否失礼?说说你的看法。
⑷多媒体放一段录像，让学生指出其待人接物的一些错误，如无条件，可让学生讨论：家里来了客人，家长不在家，你是怎样接待的?谈谈你的具体做法。
五、作业
1、完成课后练习。
2、有兴趣的同学可以再查阅《世说新语》，讲给其他同学听。
六、小结
从培养学生学习兴趣入手，联系生活实际，注重所学知识的运用，是这节课的重要的内容。阅读浅易日文言文，积累文言词语，学习中华民族的优秀文化，有助于培养学生树立正确的世界观、人生观、价值观。
频道小编推荐： |
七年级语文上册课件(篇4)
教学目标：
1、了解小说内容，体会作者丰富的想象力，感受科幻小说的魅力
2、把握小说主要情节，了解小说主要写作手法，悬念的设置和对比手法的运用。
3、领略小姑娘的崇高精神，感悟文章主旨。
教学重难点：
领略小姑娘的崇高精神，感悟文章主旨。
一、导入：
上周六，我们班组织了一次旅游——文成九溪一日游，大家都说说看，我们都带了什么去旅游?(防晒用品、零食、相机、钱等)可是有人去旅游却带了别人的眼睛，这是怎么一回事呢?请大家翻开课文23课《带上她的眼睛》，一探究竟。
二、概括大意，梳理情节，了解悬念技法。
1、谁能解答老师刚才的问题。
2、刚才我们将故事大概说了一遍，这是按照事情的起因经过结果的顺序，条理很清晰。作者有没有按照这个顺序来写?这样处理有什么好处?
明确：设置悬念，能引起读者的阅读兴趣，让读者阅读时充满期待。
3课文作者刘慈欣，乃悬念大师，文章在许多地方尤其是小姑娘言行举止上种下悬念，请找到一处，揭晓谜底。
三、了解小姑娘的精神品质，感受人物的伟大
1、过渡：当所有谜底都揭晓，悬念都解决后，再来回顾这个故事，此时涌上你心头的是什么感受?并结合课文内容说一说，你为什么会有这样的感受。
例如：沉重压抑，如此年轻美好的生命，被永久地禁闭在地心，一辈子无法与外界联系。孤独到极致，也残忍到极致。
感动敬佩，最后的留言没有诉苦，没有绝望的嚎啕，只有平静的叙述，勇敢的承担。这份坚强，勇敢，和为科学事业无私奉献的精神，让人肃然起敬。(鲁迅：真的猛士，敢于直面惨淡的人生，敢于正视淋漓的鲜血。)
小结：法国哲学家，帕斯卡尔曾说过，思想形成人的伟大，正是这份勇敢坚强乐观，愿为科学事业献身的精神才铸就了小姑娘的崇高。
2、请同学们带着这份感动敬佩再来读一读小姑娘最后的留言“……今后，我会按照研究计划努力工作的。将来，也许会有地心飞船找到“落日六号”并同它对接，但愿那时我留下的资料会有用。请你们放心，我现在已适应这里，不再觉得狭窄和封闭了，整个世界都围着我呀，我闭上眼睛就能看见上面的大草原，还可以清楚地看见那里的每一朵小花呢……”
四、从“我”和小姑娘的对比中感悟主旨
1、过渡：同学们刚才的感受都是围绕小姑娘来谈的，但是却忽略了文章中另外一个重要的人物，谁?“我”，小说以“我”的视角叙述故事，“我”是参与者，我是见证者，我也是改变者。有人说，表面上看，是“落日六号”内部的小姑娘被围困了，然而实际上是“我”被激活了。你赞同这个观点吗?
明确：赞同，小姑娘虽然身体被困地心，心灵却是诗意的自由的，“我”虽然身体是自由的，心灵却是麻木封闭的。小说的末尾，“我”觉得地球变得透明了，“我”能感受到她的心跳，听到她的歌声，“不管走到天涯海角，我离她都不会再远了”，说明两个主人公已经交融在一起了，“我”被激活了，真正地打开了被世俗封闭已久的心灵，重新拥有了对生活的热爱和诗意。小说通过“我”和小姑娘的对比以及“我”前后变化，凸显了主旨。
2、运用对比词，写下感悟。
五、总结：
这个故事发生在未来，却能让我们真实地感受到了这个世界的身影，当我们汲汲于名利，忙碌工作，执着于眼前的苟且时，不要忘了寻找生活里的诗意，不要忘了带上她的眼睛，让心灵去旅行。
六、板书设计
带上她的眼睛刘慈欣
让心灵去旅行。
七年级语文上册课件(篇5)
【教学过程】
一、揭题谈话
天空中的云来去匆匆，我们只觉得它美，但很难把这种美景写下来。六、七十年前，作家肖红却以优美的文字为我们描绘了一幅栩栩如生的火烧云图景。今天，我们随着作者的描绘，想象火烧云那纷繁的色彩和多变的形态。(板书课题，读题)
二、初读课文，想象画面
1、自由朗读，凭借拼音，读准生字字音。
2、读后反馈：
a、指名分节朗读。
b、说说作者给我们描绘了哪些奇妙的美景?
c、出示图片(投影)并作归纳，理清文章思路。
教师归纳：火烧云上来时，大地笼罩在光亮的晚霞之中，色彩繁多形态多变。火烧云下去了，恍恍惚惚。
三、美读课文，品味语言
1、反复吟读，要求边读边想象画面。
2、晶读，说说作者是怎样表现火烧云的美?
引导学生在阅读中发现(如第一自然段，作者一连用?个“……了”的句式，写在霞光的照射下，大地万物都改变了自己的颜色，也写出了当时人们的欢乐愉悦的心情;第3自然段，作者用三种不同形式的词语写出了色彩的纷繁;4、5、6三个自然段，分别用跪着的马，凶猛的狗，威武的狮子三幅图写出火烧云瞬息万变，由小到大，由清楚到模糊，最后不见了的变化过程……)
3、通读全文，要求根据自己的感受，读出对火烧云的喜爱之情。
4、熟读自己最喜欢的段落，并把它背下来。
四、讨论和练习
作者在写火烧云的颜色时说“还有些说不出来，见也没有见过的颜色”这句话的意思是什么?(颜色多得无法形容)
五、布置作业。
七年级语文上册课件(篇6)
【学习目标】
1、正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。唤起观察大自然的兴趣，激发热爱美好事物的思想感情。
2、积累用不同构词方式描写颜色的词语；领悟描写事物动态变化的表达方式。
【教学重、难点】
领悟描写事物动态变化的表达方式。
【教学时数】
1课时
【教学过程】
一、揭题谈话
天空中的云来去匆匆，我们只觉得它美，但很难把这种美景写下来。六、七十年前，作家肖红却以优美的文字为我们描绘了一幅栩栩如生的火烧云图景。今天，我们随着作者的描绘，想象火烧云那纷繁的色彩和多变的形态。(板书课题，读题)
二、初读课文，想象画面
1、自由朗读，凭借拼音，读准生字字音。
2、读后反馈：
a、指名分节朗读。
b、说说作者给我们描绘了哪些奇妙的美景？
c、出示图片(投影)并作归纳，理清文章思路。
教师归纳：火烧云上来时，大地笼罩在光亮的晚霞之中，色彩繁多形态多变。火烧云下去了，恍恍惚惚。
三、美读课文，品味语言
1、反复吟读，要求边读边想象画面。
2、晶读，说说作者是怎样表现火烧云的美？
引导学生在阅读中发现(如第一自然段，作者一连用？个“……了”的句式，写在霞光的照射下，大地万物都改变了自己的颜色，也写出了当时人们的欢乐愉悦的心情；第3自然段，作者用三种不同形式的词语写出了色彩的纷繁；4、5、6三个自然段，分别用跪着的马，凶猛的狗，威武的狮子三幅图写出火烧云瞬息万变，由小到大，由清楚到模糊，最后不见了的变化过程……)
3、通读全文，要求根据自己的感受，读出对火烧云的喜爱之情。
4、熟读自己最喜欢的段落，并把它背下来。
四、讨论和练习
作者在写火烧云的颜色时说“还有些说不出来，见也没有见过的颜色”这句话的意思是什么？(颜色多得无法形容)
五、布置作业。
